Tektronix Surge Protector cts710 User Manual

User Manual

CTS 710

SONET Test Set

070-8852-03

This document applies to firmware version 1.3

and above.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARRANTY

Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and

workmanship for a period of three (3) years from the date of shipment. If any such product

proves defective during this warranty period, Tektronix, at its option, either will repair the

defective product without charge for parts and labor, or will provide a replacement in

exchange for the defective product.

In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify Tektronix of the

defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the

performance of service. Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the

defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix, with shipping charges

prepaid. Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to

a location within the country in which the Tektronix service center is located. Customer

shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges, duties, taxes, and any other charges for

products returned to any other locations.

This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or

improper or inadequate maintenance and care. Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish

service under this warranty a) to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other

than Tektronix representatives to install, repair or service the product; b) to repair damage

resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment; or c) to service a

product that has been modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such

modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product.

THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS

PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR

IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE. TEKTRONIX’ RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE

DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY

PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY.

TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY

INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS

ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

General Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xvii

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How This Manual is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Related Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xxi

xxii

Using the CTS 710 Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii

Getting Started

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–1

1–2

1–3

1–7

1–9

Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Standard Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

First Time Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the Accessory Pouch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Up the CTS 710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Turning On the CTS 710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Turning Off the CTS 710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–10

Operating Basics

Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–1

2–2

2–4

2–6

2–9

Front-Panel Controls, Indicators, and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear-Panel Controls and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front-Panel Status Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reading the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The Basic Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

What is a Menu? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selecting Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11

Selecting Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11

Displaying Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12

Connecting Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13

Connecting Optical Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14

Connecting SONET Electrical Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–15

Connecting DS1/DS3 Electrical Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–15

Initiating Autoscan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–15

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Changing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–15

Selecting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–16

Selecting from Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–16

Changing Decimal Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17

Changing Binary Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–20

Entering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21

Working with the Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–23

Reading Files on Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–24

Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–27

Before Turning On the CTS 710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–27

Setting Transmit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–28

Setting Receive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–30

Setting the Test Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–31

Where Test Results Are Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–32

Begin the Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–33

Inserting Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–34

Adjusting Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–36

Viewing Transport Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–40

Editing the Transport Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–41

Viewing Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–43

Reference

Basic Test Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–1

3–2

3–4

3–6

3–8

Setting Up the CTS 710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Network Continuity Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transmission Signal Quality Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Measuring Bit Error Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Testing Mapping and Demapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fault Tolerance Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Response to Errors and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Response to Pointer Movements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13

Response to Line Frequency Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16

Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18

Setting Test Control Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23

Setting the Test Time Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23

Setting a Unique Test Time Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24

Setting the History Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–26

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Starting and Stopping a Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27

Making Changes While Running a Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–28

Actions You Cannot Perform While Running a Test . . . . . . 3–28

Working with Test Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–31

Saving and Recalling Instrument Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–31

Saving Instrument Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–32

Recalling Instrument Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–34

Recalling the Default Factory Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–35

Deleting Instrument Setups from Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–36

Pass/Fail Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–37

Parameters of a Pass/Fail Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–37

Fail If Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–38

Creating a Pass/Fail Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–44

Running a Pass/Fail Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–49

Changing an Existing Pass/Fail Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51

Deleting a Pass/Fail Test from Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–53

Checking Signal Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–55

Viewing Signal Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–55

Viewing the Payload (Add/Drop/Test Option Only) . . . . . . 3–56

Determining the Payload Pattern and Framing

(Add/Drop/Test Option Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–57

Printing the AutoScan Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–58

Viewing the Signal State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–58

Extended Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–61

Setting the Beeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–61

Setting SONET Transmit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–63

Steps for Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–63

Setting the Transmit Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–64

Independent Transmit and Receive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–64

Coupling Transmit and Receive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–65

Through Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–67

Setting the Transmit Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–68

Setting the Transmit Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–69

Setting the Signal Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–69

Specifying the STS to Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–70

Setting the Payload Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–71

Unequipped Payload Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–72

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

iii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Mapping a Tributary Signal (Add/Drop/Test Option Only) . . . 3–72

Mapping a Tributary with VT1.5 Floating Async Payload

Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–72

Setting the Test Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–75

Setting Overhead Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–77

How to Edit an Overhead Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–77

Editing the V5 Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–80

Bytes You Cannot Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–81

Editing the J1 Path Trace Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–82

Adding DCC and User Channel Overhead Bytes . . . . . . . . 3–84

Setting Tributary Signal Transmit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . 3–89

Steps for Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–89

Setting the Transmit Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–90

Independent Transmit and Receive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–90

Coupling Transmit and Receive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–90

Setting the Transmit Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–92

Setting the Line Clock Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–93

Setting the Transmit Line Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–93

Specifying the Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–94

Specifying the Test Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–96

Setting SONET Receive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–99

Steps for Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–99

Setting the Receive Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–100

Independent Receive and Transmit Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–101

Coupling Receive and Transmit Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–101

Setting the Receive Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–103

Setting the Signal Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–103

Specifying Which STS to Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–104

Setting the Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–104

Demultiplexing a DS1 from a DS3 Mapped in a SONET Signal

(Add/Drop/Test Option Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–107

Demapping a Tributary Signal (Add/Drop/Test Option Only) . 3–110

Dropping a Tributary Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–111

Setting the Test Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–113

Unequipped Payload Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–114

Checking Received Optical Power or Received Peak Voltage . 3–114

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Viewing Overhead Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–115

Viewing Transport Overhead Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–115

Viewing Path Overhead Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–116

Displaying the J1 Path Trace Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–116

Displaying the V5 Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–117

Dropping DCC and User Channel Overhead Bytes . . . . . . . 3–117

Controlling the Display Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–120

Setting Tributary Receive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–121

Steps for Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–121

Setting the Receive Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–122

Independent Receive and Transmit Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–123

Coupling Receive and Transmit Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–123

Setting the Receive Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–124

Setting the Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–124

Specifying the Test Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–125

Demultiplexing a DS1 from a DS3 Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–127

Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–131

Simulating Error Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–131

Specifying the Error to Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–132

Inserting Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–133

Setting Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–135

Simulating Transmit Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–138

Setting Pointers and Changing Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–141

Setting Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–141

Manual Pointer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–142

Continuous Pointer Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–147

Changing Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–149

Generating Pointer Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–151

Starting Pointer Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–156

Testing Automatic Protection Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–161

Setting the APS Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–161

Setting the K1 Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–162

Setting the K2 Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–166

Transmitting the K1 and K2 Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–170

Viewing the Network Response to APS Commands . . . . . . . . . 3–172

Viewing Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–173

Viewing a Summary of Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–173

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Viewing Detailed Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–174

Displaying an Overview of Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–175

Displaying an Analysis of Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–177

Viewing Measurement Histories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–181

Types of Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–182

Elements of the History Graph Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–186

Graph Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–186

History Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–186

Power Out Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–187

Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–187

Cursor Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–187

Measurement Results at Cursor Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–187

Zooming History Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–188

Panning History Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–190

Changing the Displayed History Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–190

Displaying Mini-Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–191

Saving and Recalling Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–192

Saving Test Results to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–192

Recalling Test Results from Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–194

Deleting Test Results from Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–195

Recalling Test Results from Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–196

Printing Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–196

Printing Main Results or Error Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–196

Printing History Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–198

Changing Instrument Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–199

Viewing the Instrument Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–199

Setting the Display Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–200

Turning the Beeper On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–201

Setting the Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–202

Setting the Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–202

Changing the Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–203

Specifying the Printer or File Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–204

Setting RS-232 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–204

Setting the Print User & Company Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–206

Setting Remote Control Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–206

Setting the GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–207

Setting RS-232 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–208

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Running Instrument Self Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–210

Running the Power Up Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–211

Appendices

Appendix A: Menu Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A–1

A–2

A–3

A–4

A–5

A–6

A–7

A–8

A–9

TEST CONTROL Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TRANSMIT SETTINGS Page (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TRANSMIT SETTINGS Page (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ERRORS & ALARMS Page (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ERRORS & ALARMS Page (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ERRORS & ALARMS Page (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ERRORS & ALARMS Page (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POINTERS & TIMING Page (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–10

POINTERS & TIMING Page (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–11

POINTERS & TIMING Page (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–12

APS COMMANDS Page (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–13

APS COMMANDS Page (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–14

APS COMMANDS Page (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–15

TRANSPORT OVERHEAD Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–16

PATH OVERHEAD Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–17

RECEIVE SETTINGS Page (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–18

RECEIVE SETTINGS Page (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–19

SIGNAL STATUS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–20

TRANSPORT OVERHEAD Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–20

PATH OVERHEAD Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–21

TEST SUMMARY Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–21

MAIN RESULTS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–22

ERROR ANALYSIS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–22

HISTORY GRAPHS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–23

SAVE RESULTS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–24

RECALL RESULTS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–24

MISC SETTINGS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–24

PRINTER SETUP Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–25

REMOTE CONTROL Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–26

INSTR CONFIG Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–27

SELF TEST Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–27

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

vii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Appendix B: Status and Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B–1

B–3

Appendix C: Default Factory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix D: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C–1

D–1

Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loop-Back Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to Proceed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System Self Test with External Loop-Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SONET Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tributary Signals (Add/Drop/Test Option Only) . . . . . . . . . . . .

E–1

E–2

E–3

E–4

E–6

Appendix F: Example Disk Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pass/Fail Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

F–1

Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–1

VGA Video Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GPIB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RS-232 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

External Clock Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibration Signal Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overhead Add/Drop Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BITS Timing Reference Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

G–1

G–3

G–4

G–5

G–7

Appendix H: Changing Optical Port Connectors . . . . . . . . . H–1

Cleaning the Optical Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Changing the Optical Port Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H–1

H–2

Appendix I: Packing for Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I–1

Glossary and Index

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

viii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

List of Figures

Figure i: Placing the Reference for Easy Viewing . . . . . . . . xxiii

Figure 1–1: Installing the Accessory Pouch . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–4

Figure 1–2: Inserting the Pouch Under the Front Panel

Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–5

1–6

Figure 1–3: Location of the D-Ring on the Accessory Pouch

Figure 1–4: Rear-Panel Controls and Connectors Used

in Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–8

Figure 1–5: ON/STBY Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–10

Figure 2–1: Controls Located Around the Display . . . . . . . .

2–2

Figure 2–2: Front-Panel Controls, Indicators, and

Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–3

2–4

2–5

2–6

2–7

2–9

Figure 2–3: Rear-Panel Controls and Connectors . . . . . . . .

Figure 2–4: Status Lights (With Option 22 Installed) . . . . .

Figure 2–5: Major Areas of the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2–6: Specific Elements of the Display . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2–7: The Five Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2–8: Menus and Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10

Figure 2–9: Menu Select Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11

Figure 2–10: How to Display a Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12

Figure 2–11: Help Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13

Figure 2–12: Selecting a Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–16

Figure 2–13: Selecting Choices From a List . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17

Figure 2–14: Selecting USER DEFINED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–18

Figure 2–15: Entering a Numeric Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19

Figure 2–16: Selecting a Byte for Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–20

Figure 2–17: Editing a Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21

Figure 2–18: Selecting a Text String for Editing . . . . . . . . . 2–22

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Figure 2–19: Editing a Text String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–23

Figure 2–20: Setup for the Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–28

Figure 2–21: The TRANSMIT SETTINGS Page of the

TRANSMIT Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–29

Figure 2–22: The TEST TIME Page of the UTILITY Menu 2–31

Figure 2–23: The TEST SUMMARY Page of the RESULTS

Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–32

Figure 2–24: The MAIN RESULTS Page of the RESULTS

Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–33

Figure 2–25: The Message Line and Test Status Indicator . 2–34

Figure 2–26: The ERRORS & ALARMS Page of the

TRANSMIT Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–35

Figure 2–27: The POINTERS & TIMING Page of the

TRANSMIT Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–37

Figure 2–28: Adjusting Frequency Offset Using the Knob . 2–39

Figure 2–29: The TRANSPORT OVERHEAD Page of

the TRANSMIT Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–41

Figure 2–30: The Display in Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–42

Figure 2–31: The TEST SUMMARY Page of the RESULTS

Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–44

Figure 2–32: The MAIN RESULTS Page of the RESULTS

Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–45

Figure 3–1: Setup to Check Network Continuity . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3–2: Setup to Check a Transmission Link . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3–3: Setup to Test Mapping and Demapping . . . . . .

Figure 3–4: Setup to Check Error and Alarm Response . . .

3–2

3–4

3–6

3–9

Figure 3–5: Setup to Check Pointer Movements . . . . . . . . . 3–14

Figure 3–6: Setup to Check Line Frequency Offset

Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16

Figure 3–7: Setup to Monitor Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19

Figure 3–8: The Test Control Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24

Figure 3–9: Setting a USER DEFINED Test Duration . . . . 3–25

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Figure 3–10: Elapsed Time and Bar Graph Indicators . . . . 3–28

Figure 3–11: The SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS Page . . . 3–33

Figure 3–12: The RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS Page 3–35

Figure 3–13: Selecting a Disk File for Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . 3–36

Figure 3–14: The SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS Page . . . . . . . . 3–37

Figure 3–15: Entering Fail If Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–47

Figure 3–16: The TEST BEGIN Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51

Figure 3–17: Selecting a Pass/Fail Test for Deleting . . . . . . . 3–53

Figure 3–18: The AUTOSCAN Dialog Box Showing Signal

Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–56

Figure 3–19: Viewing Tributary Signal Structure . . . . . . . . 3–57

Figure 3–20: The Meaning of the Icons in the Autoscan

Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–58

Figure 3–21: Front-Panel Status Lights (with Add/Drop/Test

Option Installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–59

Figure 3–22: Sequence for Setting SONET Signal

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–63

Figure 3–23: Sequence for Setting SONET Signal

Parameters When Mapping a Tributary Signal . . . . . . . 3–64

Figure 3–24: SONET Transmit Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–65

Figure 3–25: CTS 710 in Through Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–68

Figure 3–26: Mapping a Tributary Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–73

Figure 3–27: Editing the User Word Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–77

Figure 3–28: Editing the Z2 Transmit Overhead Byte . . . . . 3–79

Figure 3–29: Editing an Overhead Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–80

Figure 3–30: Editing the J1 Path Trace Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–84

Figure 3–31: Adding Data into the DCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–86

Figure 3–32: Adding Data into the User Channel . . . . . . . . . 3–87

Figure 3–33: Sequence for Setting Tributary Signal

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–89

Figure 3–34: Tributary Transmit Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–91

Figure 3–35: Editing the User Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–97

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Figure 3–36: Sequence for Setting SONET Signal

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–99

Figure 3–37: Sequence for Setting SONET Signal

Parameters When Demapping a Tributary Signal . . . . . 3–100

Figure 3–38: SONET Receive Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–101

Figure 3–39: Setting Tributary Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–110

Figure 3–40: Displaying Received Optical Power . . . . . . . . . 3–115

Figure 3–41: J1 Path Trace Message Received by the

CTS 710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–117

Figure 3–42: Dropping Data from the DCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–118

Figure 3–43: Dropping the User Channel Data Byte . . . . . . 3–119

Figure 3–44: Sequence for Setting Tributary Signal

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–121

Figure 3–45: Sequence for Setting Signal Parameters to

Demultiplex a DS1 from a DS3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–121

Figure 3–46: Tributary Signal Receive Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–122

Figure 3–47: Setting An Error Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–135

Figure 3–48: Manual Pointer Control Choices . . . . . . . . . . . 3–142

Figure 3–49: Alternating Burst Pointer Movement . . . . . . . 3–144

Figure 3–50: Incrementing Pointer Location Once Every

Two Milliseconds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–149

Figure 3–51: Offsetting the Transmit Rate by +4.6 ppm . . . 3–151

Figure 3–52: The Three Periods of a Pointer Sequence . . . . 3–152

Figure 3–53: An Example of a Pointer Sequence . . . . . . . . . 3–153

Figure 3–54: Status Display While Pointer Sequences are

Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–160

Figure 3–55: The APS COMMANDS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–162

Figure 3–56: The RECEIVE Column on the

APS COMMANDS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–172

Figure 3–57: The Test Summary Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–174

Figure 3–58: Bar Graphs Showing Code Violations and

Errored Seconds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–182

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

xii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Figure 3–59: Line Graph Showing Pointer Value . . . . . . . . . 3–184

Figure 3–60: On/Off Graphs Showing Failures and Alarms 3–185

Figure 3–61: Elements of a History Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–188

Figure 3–62: Changing the Displayed History Graph . . . . . 3–191

Figure 3–63: The SAVE RESULTS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–193

Figure 3–64: The RECALL RESULTS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–195

Figure 3–65: The PRINT CONTROL Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 3–197

Figure 3–66: The MISC SETTINGS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–201

Figure 3–67: The PRINTER SETUP Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–203

Figure 3–68: The REMOTE CONTROL Page . . . . . . . . . . . 3–208

Figure E–1: Front-Panel Status Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E–1

Figure G–1: CTS 710 Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . G–1

Figure G–2: The VGA Video Output Connector . . . . . . . . . G–2

Figure G–3: The RS-232 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–3

Figure G–4: The Overhead Add/Drop Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–5

Figure H–1: Removing the Optical Bulkhead Connector . . H–2

Figure H–2: FC Optical Bulkhead Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . H–3

Figure H–3: ST Optical Bulkhead Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . H–3

Figure H–4: DIN 47256 Optical Bulkhead Assembly . . . . . . H–4

Figure H–5: SC Optical Bulkhead Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . H–4

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

xiii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

List of Tables

Table 1–1: Fuse and Fuse Cap Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . .

1–8

1–9

Table 1–2: Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2–1: Icons that Appear in the Display . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–8

Table 2–2: CTS 710 Disk File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–24

Table 3–1: LTE Responses to Errors and Alarms . . . . . . . . 3–9

Table 3–2: Test Duration Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–26

Table 3–3: Actions You Cannot Perform While a Test

is Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29

Table 3–4: Fail If Conditions of a Pass/Fail Test . . . . . . . . . 3–39

Table 3–5: Green Status Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–59

Table 3–6: Red and Yellow Status Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–60

Table 3–7: Choices for Bits 5, 6, and 7 of the V5 Byte . . . . . 3–81

Table 3–8: Overhead Bytes That Cannot Be Edited . . . . . . 3–81

Table 3–9: Bytes You Cannot Edit Due to Parameter

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–82

Table 3–10: Tributary Rate Line Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–94

Table 3–11: Maximum Error Rates for SONET Signals . . . 3–134

Table 3–12: Maximum Error Rates for Tributary Signals . 3–134

Table 3–13: Pointer Sequences Generated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–153

Table 3–14: Availability of Pointer Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . 3–155

Table 3–15: Status Lines for Pointer Sequences . . . . . . . . . 3–160

Table 3–16: Choices for Bits 1–4 of the K1 Byte When

Mode is Set to Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–163

Table 3–17: Choices for Bits 1–4 of the K1 Byte When

Mode is Set to Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–164

Table 3–18: Choices for Bits 5–8 of the K1 Byte . . . . . . . . . 3–166

Table 3–19: Choices for Bits 1–4 of the K2 Byte . . . . . . . . . 3–168

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

xiv

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Table 3–20: Choices for Bit 5 of the K2 Byte When Mode

is Set to Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–169

Table 3–21: Choices for Bit 5 of the K2 Byte When Mode

is Set to Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–169

Table 3–22: Choices for Bits 6–8 of the K2 Byte . . . . . . . . . 3–170

Table 3–23: Results Displayed on MAIN RESULTS Page . 3–175

Table 3–24: T1M1 Section Analysis Results Displayed on

the ERROR ANALYSIS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–178

Table 3–25: T1M1 Line Analysis Results Displayed on the

ERROR ANALYSIS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–178

Table 3–26: T1M1 Path Analysis Results Displayed on the

ERROR ANALYSIS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–179

Table 3–27: T1M1 VT1.5 Analysis Results Displayed on the

ERROR ANALYSIS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–179

Table 3–28: T1M1 Payload Analysis Results Displayed on

ERROR ANALYSIS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–180

Table 3–29: DS1 Path Analysis Results Displayed on

ERROR ANALYSIS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–181

Table 3–30: DS3 Path Analysis Results Displayed on

ERROR ANALYSIS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–181

Table 3–31: Measurements Displayed as Bar Graphs . . . . . 3–183

Table 3–32: Measurements Displayed as a Line Graph . . . 3–184

Table 3–33: Measurements Displayed as On/Off Graphs

for SONET Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–185

Table 3–34: Measurements Displayed as On/Off Graphs

for Tributary Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–186

Table 3–35: Time Represented by Bars on History Graph . 3–188

Table 3–36: Lines of the Instrument Configuration Page . . 3–199

Table C–1: Default Factory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .

C–1

D–1

Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities . . . . . . D–10

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Table D–3: Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–17

Table D–4: Physical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–18

Table D–5: Certifications and Compliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–18

Table E–1: Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E–2

Table G–1: VGA Video Output Connector Pin Assignment

Table G–2: RS-232 Rear Panel Connector Pin Assignment

G–2

G–3

Table G–3: Overhead Channels Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–5

Table G–4: Overhead Channels Dropped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–6

Table G–5: Overhead Add/Drop Port Data Signal Pin

Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–6

Table G–6: Overhead Add/Drop Port Additional Pin

Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–7

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

xvi

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General Safety Summary

Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent

damage to this product or any products connected to it.

Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.

To avoid potential hazards, use this product only as specified.

Injury Precautions

Use Proper Power Cord

To avoid fire hazard, use only the power cord specified for this

product.

Avoid Electric Overload

To avoid electric shock or fire hazard, do not apply a voltage to a

terminal that is outside the range specified for that terminal.

Ground the Product

This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the

power cord. To avoid electric shock, the grounding conductor must

be connected to earth ground. Before making connections to the

input or output terminals of the product, ensure that the product is

properly grounded.

Do Not Operate Without Covers

To avoid electric shock or fire hazard, do not operate this product

with covers or panels removed.

Use Proper Fuse

To avoid fire hazard, use only the fuse type and rating specified for

this product.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

xvii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General Safety Summary

Do Not Operate in Wet/Damp Conditions

To avoid electric shock, do not operate this product in wet or damp

conditions.

Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmosphere

To avoid injury or fire hazard, do not operate this product in an

explosive atmosphere.

Wear Eye Protection

To avoid eye injury, wear eye protection if there is a possibility of

exposure to high-intensity rays.

Product Damage Precautions

Use Proper Power Source

Do not operate this product from a power source that applies more

than the voltage specified.

Provide Proper Ventilation

To prevent product overheating, provide proper ventilation.

Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures

If you suspect there is damage to this product, have it inspected by

qualified service personnel.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

xviii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General Safety Summary

Safety Terms and Symbols

Terms in This Manual

These terms may appear in this manual:

WARNING. Warning statements identify conditions or practices that

could result in injury or loss of life.

CAUTION. Caution statements identify conditions or practices that

could result in damage to this product or other property.

Terms on the Product

These terms may appear on the product:

DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you

read the marking.

WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as

you read the marking.

CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product.

Symbols on the Product

The following symbols may appear on the product:

Double

Insulated

DANGER

High Voltage

Protective Ground

(Earth) Terminal

ATTENTION

Refer to

Manual

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

xix

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General Safety Summary

Certifications and Compliances

CSA Certified Power Cords

CSA Certification includes the products and power cords appropriate

for use in the North America power network. All other power cords

supplied are approved for the country of use.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preface

This manual describes how to use the Tektronix CTS 710 SONET

Test Set. This manual is your primary source of information about

how the CTS 710 functions.

How This Manual is Organized

This manual is divided into four sections: Getting Started, Operating

Basics, Reference, and Appendices.

H Getting Started provides an overview of the CTS 710 and

describes first time operation.

H Operating Basics explains the basic principles of operating the

CTS 710. The Operating Basics section also includes a tutorial

which introduces you to most of the capabilities of the CTS 710

by having you run a BER test.

H Reference provides explanations of how to perform detailed tasks.

H The Appendices provide a listing of specifications, default factory

settings, an incoming inspection test, and other useful informa-

tion.

Conventions

This manual uses the following conventions:

H The names of front-panel controls and menus appear in all upper

case letters, for example, TRANSMIT and HELP.

H Names appear in the same case in this manual as they appear on

the display of the CTS 710, for example, Test Duration and

USER DEFINED.

H Within a procedure, a specific button to be pressed or a parameter

to be selected appears in boldface print. For example, press the

AUTOSCAN button or select Continuous.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

xxi

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preface

The Tutorial and the Reference sections frequently present

procedures in tables. Perform the procedure by reading from left to

right in the table (see example below). The word none in a cell

indicates that no action is required.

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Begin here with Step 2

Step 1

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Step 7

Step 6

Step 8, CTS 710

instruction is

complete

Some procedures require several iterations of highlighting parame-

ters and selecting choices. Some procedures may require more than

one menu button or menu page selection as well.

Related Manuals

The following documents are also available for the CTS 710 SONET

Test Set:

H The CTS 710 SONET Test Set Reference (Tektronix part number

070-9336-XX) provides a quick overview of the menu structure,

front-panel buttons, example alarm responses, and a glossary.

H The CTS 710 SONET Test Set Programmer Manual (Tektronix

part number 070-8924-XX) describes how to control the CTS 710

using an instrument controller.

H The CTS 710 SONET Test Set & CTS 750 SDH Test Set Reference

(Tektronix part number 070-8854-XX) provides a quick overview

of the instrument programming commands.

H The CTS 710 SONET Test Set & CTS 750 SDH Test Set Service

Manual (Tektronix part number 070-8853-XX) provides

information on maintaining and servicing your instrument to the

module level.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

xxii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preface

Using the CTS 710 Reference

The Reference presents an overview of the CTS 710 menu structure,

front-panel buttons, examples of alarm responses, and a glossary. To

store the Reference for easy viewing, fold the card to display the

desired page and slide the card behind the window located on the

inside of the top flap of the pouch (see Figure i).

Figure i: Placing the Reference for Easy Viewing

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

xxiii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preface

Contacting Tektronix

Product

Support

For application-oriented questions about a Tektronix

measurement product, call toll free in North

America:

1-800-TEK-WIDE (1-800-835-9433 ext. 2400)

6:00 a.m. – 5:00 p.m. Pacific time

Or contact us by e-mail:

[email protected]

For product support outside of North America,

contact your local Tektronix distributor or sales

office.

Service

Support

Contact your local Tektronix distributor or sales

office. Or visit our web site for a listing of

worldwide service locations.

http://www.tek.com

In North America:

For other

information 1-800-TEK-WIDE (1-800-835-9433)

An operator will direct your call.

To write us Tektronix, Inc.

P.O. Box 1000

Wilsonville, OR 97070-1000

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

xxiv

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting Started

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting Started

This section provides a description of the CTS 710, a list of standard

and optional accessories, and explains how to operate the CTS 710

for the first time.

Product Description

The Tektronix CTS 710 SONET Test Set is a rugged, portable test set

designed for installing and maintaining telecommunications

networks. The CTS 710 is a SONET analyzer that combines bit error

rate test capabilities with overhead testing, payload mapping, and

demapping in one unit. The CTS 710 features the following

capabilities:

H STS-1, STS-3, OC-1, OC-3, OC-12, DS1, and DS3 transmit and

receive

H Optical interface available at 1310 nm and 1550 nm

H Bit Error Rate testing

H BIP error monitoring and analysis

H Payload mapping and demapping

H Tributary Add/Drop/Test

H Pointer generation, including sequences, and analysis

H Alarm generation and analysis

H DS1/DS3 error monitoring and analysis

H DS1 Demultiplex from direct-input DS3 or a DS3 embedded in a

SONET rate signal

H Performance monitoring

H APS testing

H DCC and user channel access

H Programmable via IEEE 488.2 and RS-232

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

1–1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting Started

The CTS 710 meets the needs of the craftsperson and the network

engineer. The CTS 710 meets the requirements of those working in

network installation and maintenance by providing the capability to

perform:

H Network integrity testing

H In-service performance monitoring

H Stimulus and response testing

H Stress testing

H Overhead testing

Accessories

Some accessories are included with the CTS 710 SONET Test Set. If

you wish to purchase optional accessories or additional standard

accessories, see a Tektronix products catalog or contact your local

Tektronix field representative.

Standard Accessories

H CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual, Tektronix part number

070-8852-XX

H CTS 710 SONET Test Set Reference, Tektronix part number

070-9336-XX

H Instrument Front Cover, Tektronix part number 200-3232-XX

H 75 W loopback cable, Tektronix part number 012-1338-XX

H Pouch, Tektronix part number 016-1266-XX

Optional Accessories

H CTS 710 SONET Test Set Programmer Manual (Tektronix part

number 070-8924-XX)

H CTS 710 SONET Test Set & CTS 750 SDH Test Set Reference,

Programming commands (Tektronix part number 070-8854-XX)

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

1–2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting Started

H CTS 710 SONET Test Set & CTS 750 SDH Test Set Service

Manual (Tektronix part number 070-8853-XX)

H Hard Transit Case, Tektronix part number 016-1157-XX

H Soft Carrying Bag, Tektronix part number 016-1158-XX

H K212 Portable Instrument Cart

H Optical Connector Kit, Tektronix part number 020-1885-XX

First Time Operation

This section describes how to set up the CTS 710 for the first time.

Installing the Accessory Pouch

The CTS 710 ships with an accessory pouch that mounts on top of

the instrument. The pouch is not installed at the factory. To install

the accessory pouch:

1. Place the CTS 710 on a table or work bench with the front facing

toward you.

2. Center the pouch plate and insert the rear edge of the plate in the

space between the cabinet top and the rear panel trim (see part A

of Figure 1–1).

3. Move the pouch sideways as necessary to line up the key slots in

the pouch plate with the keys on the rear panel (the plate is

centered when it is aligned) and push the plate all the way in (see

part B of Figure 1–1).

4. While keeping the pouch plate pushed under the rear panel trim,

reach under the pouch plate and carefully remove the backing

from the Velcro strip to expose the adhesive on the Velcro strip.

The Velcro should remain attached to the pouch plate.

5. Grasp the pouch plate assembly with both hands near the front of

the assembly.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

1–3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting Started

Rear Panel Trim Gap

Pouch

Plate

Velcro Strip

Pouch Plate

Rear

Panel

Trim

(Top View)

A. Push the pouch plate into the rear panel trim gap.

Key Slots Under

Rear Panel Trim

B. Center the pouch plate to align with key slot under the rear panel trim.

Figure 1–1: Installing the Accessory Pouch

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

1–4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting Started

CAUTION. In the next step, use only enough force to clear the front

panel trim with the plate front edge. Excessive force will cause a

permanent bow in the plate.

6. Push back on the pouch plate and press down with the heels of

your hands to bow the plate enough to slide the front of the plate

into the space between the cabinet top and the front panel trim

(see Figure 1–2).

7. Move the front of the pouch as needed to line up the slots in the

plate with the keys on the front panel.

8. Release the pressure on the plate to allow it to return to its normal

flat shape.

9. Press down firmly to secure the Velcro strip to the top of the

cabinet top.

Velcro Strip

Figure 1–2: Inserting the Pouch Under the Front Panel Trim

CAUTION. Do not use the D-ring (see Figure 1–3) on the pouch plate

to lift the CTS 710. Using the D-ring to lift the CTS 710 can pull the

accessory pouch off the CTS 710, resulting in damage to the

CTS 710.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

1–5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting Started

DO NOT LIFT

Instrument

With D-Ring

Figure 1–3: Location of the D-Ring on the Accessory Pouch

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

1–6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting Started

Setting Up the CTS 710

Before you use the CTS 710, ensure that it is properly set up and

powered on.

To properly set up the CTS 710, do the following:

1. Be sure that the environment in which you will operate the

CTS 710 is within instrument specifications. Specifications for

temperature, relative humidity, altitude, vibrations, and emissions

are included in Appendix D.

2. Leave space around the CTS 710 for cooling. Verify that the air

intake and exhaust holes on the sides of the cabinet (where the

fan operates) are free of any airflow obstructions. Leave at least

5 cm (2 in) free on each side.

WARNING. To avoid electrical shock, be sure that the power cord is

disconnected before checking the fuse.

3. Check the fuse to be sure it is the proper type and rating (see

Figure 1–4). The CTS 710 works with one of two fuses,

depending on the AC supply. Each fuse requires its own cap (see

Table 1–1). The CTS 710 is shipped with the UL-approved fuse

installed.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

1–7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting Started

Power

Connector

Ground

Fuse

Principal

Power Switch

Figure 1–4: Rear-Panel Controls and Connectors Used in Setup

Table 1–1: Fuse and Fuse Cap Part Numbers

Fuse Tektronix

Part Number

Fuse Cap Tektronix

Part Number

Fuse

0.25 in 1.25 in

(UL 198.6, 3AG): 5 A

FAST, 250 V

159-0014-XX

200-2264-XX

5 mm 20 mm

159-0255-XX

200-2265-XX

(IEC 127): 4 A, 250 V

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

1–8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting Started

4. Check that you have the proper electrical connections. The

CTS 710 power requirements are listed in Table 1–2.

Table 1–2: Power Requirements

Voltage Range

Frequency Range

Maximum Power

90–132 V

48–62 Hz

250 W

180–250 V

48–62 Hz

250 W

5. Connect the proper power cord from the rear-panel power

connector (see Figure 1–4) to the power system.

Turning On the CTS 710

To properly turn on the CTS 710:

1. Check that the rear-panel principal power switch is on. The

principal power switch controls all AC power to the instrument.

2. If the CTS 710 is not turned on (the screen is blank), press the

front-panel ON/STBY (On/Standby) button to turn it on (see

Figure 1–5).

The ON/STBY button controls power to most instrument circuits.

Power continues to go to certain parts even when this switch is

set to STBY.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

1–9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting Started

ON/STBY

Button

Figure 1–5: ON/STBY Button

The CTS 710 performs an internal self test each time it is turned on.

When turned on, it displays a screen that states whether or not it

passed the self test. (If the self test passes, the status display screen is

removed after a few seconds.)

3. Check the self-test results.

If the self test fails, contact your local Tektronix Service Center for

assistance.

Turning Off the CTS 710

Press the ON/STBY button to turn off the CTS 710.

Once the CTS 710 is in use, it is typical to leave the principal power

switch on and use the ON/STBY button as the power switch. If the

CTS 710 is frequently moved, use the principal power switch to turn

the CTS 710 on and off.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

1–10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operating Basics

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Functional Overview

This section describes how to use and navigate through the basic

functions of the CTS 710, including:

H Controls, indicators, and connectors

H Elements of the display

H Menu structure

H On-line help

H Connecting signals

H Parameter selection and editing

H Disk drive operation

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Functional Overview

Front-Panel Controls, Indicators, and Connectors

Figures 2–1 and 2–2 identify the controls, indicators, and connectors

located on the front panel of the CTS 710 SONET Test Set.

These buttons assign the displayed choice to the

selected parameter or execute the selected action.

ON/STBY Switch

(the principal

power switch is on

the rear panel)

These buttons select the

pages of the current menu.

Figure 2–1: Controls Located Around the Display

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Functional Overview

Each of these buttons

perform a specific function.

Disk Drive

The knob is

primarily used

to highlight

parameters

within pages.

DS1

Connectors

(optional)

Status Lights

These buttons

select one of

the five

DS3

Connectors

(optional)

menus.

LASER IN

USE Indicator

Clear History

Button

Optical

Connector

Electrical

Connectors

Optical

Connector

Figure 2–2: Front-Panel Controls, Indicators, and Connectors

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Functional Overview

Rear-Panel Controls and Connectors

VGA

Video

Output

GPIB RS-232

Port Port

External Clock

Input (Optional)

Power

Connector

Ground

Calibration Overhead 1.544 Mb/s (Connector

Fuse

Principal

Power

Switch

Signal

Output

Add/Drop

Port

BITS

Timing

Not Used)

Reference

Input

Figure 2–3: Rear-Panel Controls and Connectors

Front-Panel Status Lights

The status lights make it easy to quickly determine the condition of

the received signal. There are three types of front-panel status lights.

H Green status lights. Green lights indicate whether a signal is

present and whether the CTS 710 has locked onto the signal.

H Red status lights. When a red status light is on, it means that the

indicated event is occurring. When the red light is off, no event is

occurring.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Functional Overview

H Yellow history lights. Once an event has been detected, a yellow

history light is turned on. The yellow history light shows that the

associated event occurred at some time in the past. Yellow history

lights remain on until you reset the event history by pressing the

CLEAR HISTORY button, starting a new test, or changing the

Receive Rate.

Yellow history lights

indicate an event has

occurred.

Green lights

indicate the

condition is true.

CLEAR HISTORY

button clears

history of events.

Red lights indicate an

event is occurring

now.

Figure 2–4: Status Lights (With Option 22 Installed)

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Functional Overview

Reading the Display

There are several major areas that make up the CTS 710 display (see

Figure 2–5).

This area displays the contents of the different

pages of each menu. Some pages display control

parameters; some pages display test results.

The menu name appears

here; the menu name is

always visible.

Status message

area. This area

is always visible.

Signal

Status

Indicators

Icons

Usually these

items are the

values that can

be assigned to

the selected

parameter.

Pages of

the Menu

Pressing one of these buttons selects the

page identified above the button.

Figure 2–5: Major Areas of the Display

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Functional Overview

Figure 2–6 provides a guide to specific areas of the display.

Highlighted parameters can be

changed; dimmed parameters

cannot be changed under the

current setup.

Choices or actions

available for the

selected parameter

Received

Signal

Test

Transmitted

Signal Status

Indicator

Menu Test State

Name Indicator

Highlighted Status

Parameter Indicator

Progress

Indicator

Parameters

or options

controlled

from this

page

Selected

page is

highlighted

Pages are

identified by

page tabs.

Pages of the

“–more–” means

additional

choices are

available.

Figure 2–6: Specific Elements of the Display

Table 2–1 provides a list of icons that appear on the display. Icons

are used to identify information, indicate instrument status, and

clarify available actions.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Functional Overview

Table 2–1: Icons that Appear in the Display

Icon

Meaning

Transmitted signal

Received signal

CTS 710 is in through mode

CTS 710 is in coupled mode

Use the knob

Not allowed

File stored on disk

File stored in memory

Message or warning identifier

Press the button to perform the indicated action

The CTS 710 is busy

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Functional Overview

The Basic Menu Structure

The CTS 710 is controlled primarily through its menu system.

Though several controls are located on the front panel, such as

INSERT ERROR, most functions are controlled from one of the five

menus. Figure 2–7 shows the five menus.

Figure 2–7: The Five Menus

What is a Menu?

A menu groups related functions together. For example, all settings

that affect the signal transmitted by the CTS 710 are located in the

TRANSMIT menu. Each menu is made up of pages. A page is

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Functional Overview

identified by a page tab located at the bottom of the display (see

Figure 2–8).

RECALL

SAVE

TEST

CONTROL

INSTRUMENT PASS/FAIL INSTRUMENT PASS/FAIL

SETUPS

TESTS

SETUPS

TESTS

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

ERRORS

& ALARMS

POINTERS

& TIMING

APS

TRANSPORT

PATH

COMMANDS OVERHEAD OVERHEAD

RECEIVE

SETTINGS

SIGNAL

STATUS

TRANSPORT

OVERHEAD OVERHEAD

PATH

TEST

SUMMARY

MAIN

RESULTS

ERROR

ANALYSIS

HISTORY

GRAPHS

SAVE

RESULTS

RECALL

RESULTS

MISC

SETTINGS

PRINTER

SETUP

REMOTE

CONTROL

INSTR

CONFIG

SELF

TEST

Figure 2–8: Menus and Pages

The CTS 710 always displays a menu. The name of the current menu

is shown near the top of the display. To change to another menu,

press a menu button on the front panel.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Functional Overview

NOTE. The only times pressing a menu button does not change menus

are when a dialog box is displayed or when you are entering a value

for a parameter. You must first exit the dialog box or finish entering

the value before you can change menus.

A page usually provides control over a related group of instrument

functions or parameters. For example, the TRANSMIT SETTINGS

page in the TRANSMIT menu controls the rate, format, and active

channels of the signal transmitted by the CTS 710. However, some

pages display information rather than provide control over settings;

for example, the pages of the RESULTS menu display various test

results.

Selecting Menus

To display a menu, press the button on the front panel with the same

name (see Figure 2–9).

Figure 2–9: Menu Select Buttons

Selecting Pages

To select a page within a menu, press the button beneath the page tab

located at the bottom of the display (see Figure 2–10).

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Functional Overview

Page Tab

Display the page by

pressing the button

below the page tab.

Figure 2–10: How to Display a Page

Displaying Help

To display help, press the HELP front-panel button.

When the HELP dialog box appears, use the knob to select the topic

you wish to view (see Figure 2–11). After you select the topic to

view, select View Help to see the help screen.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Functional Overview

Figure 2–11: Help Dialog Box

Once you press View Help, the help screen for that topic is

displayed. If a help topic covers more than one page, you can display

the next page by selecting Page Down. To display the previous page,

select Page Up.

To display help in a different language, select Change Language.

Then, to display help in French, select Francais. To display help in

German, select Deutsch.

When you finish reading the help text, you can exit the help dialog

box by selecting EXIT. If you wish to read additional help topics,

select Help Menu to return to the main help screen.

Connecting Signals

To connect signals to the CTS 710, use the electrical and optical

connectors located at the bottom and right side of the front panel.

For optical connections, the CTS 710 accepts both single mode and

multimode fiber. For electrical connections, the CTS 710 accepts

75 W coaxial cable with BNC connectors for SONET rates and DS3

signals. The CTS 710 accepts bantam connectors for DS1 signals.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Functional Overview

Connecting Optical Signals

NOTE. The optical TRANSMIT output is produced by a Class 1 laser

device. The output from a Class 1 laser is safe to view without

special eye protection. However, because other optical signals in

your environment may exceed the Class 1 limits, we recommend eye

protection as a precaution.

To connect optical signals to the CTS 710:

1. Unscrew the dustcap that covers the optical port on the CTS 710.

2. Remove the dustcap (if present) covering the connector on the

optical fiber.

3. Carefully insert the transmit end of the optical fiber into the

RECEIVE port on the CTS 710. Line up the key on the optical

fiber connector with the cutout on the optical port connector.

Make sure that the optical fiber connector is fully inserted into

the optical port.

4. Tighten the optical fiber connector so it does not accidentally

come loose during use.

5. Carefully insert the receive end of the optical fiber into the

TRANSMIT port on the CTS 710. Make sure that the optical

fiber connector is fully inserted into the optical port.

6. Tighten the optical fiber connector so it does not accidentally

come loose during use. Tighten the connectors only finger tight;

do not use a tool to tighten the connectors.

CAUTION. To prevent damage to the optical port connectors and to

keep them clean, always replace the dustcaps on the optical port

connectors when not using the optical ports.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Functional Overview

Connecting SONET Electrical Signals

To connect SONET electrical signals to the CTS 710:

1. Connect the transmit end of the signal cable to the RECEIVE

connector on the CTS 710.

2. Connect the receive end of the signal cable to the TRANSMIT

connector on the CTS 710.

Connecting DS1/DS3 Electrical Signals

To connect DS1/DS3 electrical signals to the CTS 710:

1. Connect the transmit end of the signal cable to the IN connector

for the appropriate rate on the CTS 710.

2. Connect the receive end of the signal cable to the OUT connector

for the appropriate rate on the CTS 710.

Initiating Autoscan

Autoscan is a feature that automatically scans the received signal and

changes the CTS 710 receive settings to match the received signal.

Autoscan is the quickest way to set up the CTS 710 to view a signal.

To initiate autoscan, press the AUTOSCAN front-panel button. For

detailed information on the AUTOSCAN function, see Checking

Signal Status on page 3–55.

Changing Parameters

Most of the menu pages in the CTS 710 contain parameters (or

settings) that you can change. The choices available for a parameter

appear in four ways (examples in parentheses):

H As a list (Test Pattern: PRBS 2^23–1, PRBS 2^20–1, ...)

H As a decimal number (Frequency Offset: 74.3 ppm)

H As a binary number (Z1 Byte: 10101111)

H As a text string (File Name: TEST_34)

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Functional Overview

Selecting Parameters

To change a parameter, use the knob to highlight it. As you turn the

knob, the display highlight moves from parameter to parameter (see

Figure 2–12).

This is the selected parameter. It is

identified by the location of the highlight.

Turning the

knob moves

the highlight

to another

parameter.

Figure 2–12: Selecting a Parameter

The parameter values displayed in high-intensity text indicate

parameters that you can change. If a parameter is displayed in

dimmed text, it cannot be selected under the current setup.

Selecting from Lists

Most parameters have a set group of choices available. The choices

are presented as a list, located along the right side of the display.

Press the button next to the choice to assign that choice to the

highlighted parameter.

Sometimes parameters have more than five choices available. When

more than five choices are available, the bottom choice changes to

–more–. Selecting –more– displays additional choices. Each time

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Functional Overview

you press –more– the next list of choices is displayed. Below –more–

is a line that shows which list of choices is displayed. When the last

list of choices is displayed, pressing –more– displays the first list of

choices again (see Figure 2–13).

Pressing a button assigns

the choice next to the button

to the highlighted parameter.

List of

Choices

Selecting –more–

displays additional

choices.

Figure 2–13: Selecting Choices From a List

Changing Decimal Numbers

Some parameters allow you to set a numeric value for them. For

these parameters, preset choices are always provided to save you

time. However, if the preset choices are not appropriate for your

needs, you can set specific values by selecting the USER DEFINED

choice (see Figure 2–14).

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Functional Overview

Selecting USER

DEFINED allows you to

enter a numeric value.

Figure 2–14: Selecting USER DEFINED

After you select USER DEFINED, the buttons at the right side of the

display are reassigned, as shown in Figure 2–15.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Functional Overview

Selecting this choice allows the knob

to make large changes quickly.

Turning the knob

changes this value.

Selecting this

choice allows the

knob to make

small changes.

You must select

DONE to exit

the edit mode.

Figure 2–15: Entering a Numeric Value

After you press USER DEFINED, the CTS 710 enters edit mode. In

edit mode, you change the value of the highlighted parameter by

turning the knob. When you have set the parameter to the desired

value, select DONE to enter the value and exit edit mode.

NOTE. The new value does not take effect until DONE is selected.

When in edit mode, the knob can work in several ways. As shown in

Figure 2–15, the knob can be assigned to make either coarse or fine

adjustments to the highlighted parameter. For other parameters, the

knob is assigned to change different elements of the selected

parameter. For example, when setting a test time, rather than making

coarse or fine adjustments, the knob is assigned to change days,

hours, minutes, or seconds.

The knob icon is displayed in solid form to indicate which function it

is currently assigned to. The knob icon is displayed in outline form

next to other possible choices.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Functional Overview

Changing Binary Numbers

There are two kinds of binary numbers that can be changed in the

CTS 710: payload patterns and overhead bytes. As with other

numerical values, you can select preset values or enter specific

values by selecting Edit Byte.

To change a byte:

1. Select the byte with the knob (see Figure 2–16).

2. Change the byte by selecting one of the preset choices at the right

side of the display or to enter a different bit pattern, select EDIT

BYTE. This places the CTS 710 into edit mode.

The highlighted

byte can be

quickly set to

these choices by

pressing the

button next to the

desired choice.

Select the byte to edit

by using the knob.

Select EDIT BYTE to change

the bits within the byte.

Figure 2–16: Selecting a Byte for Editing

When in edit mode, the choices along the right side of the display

change (see Figure 2–17). The highlight now applies to a single

bit.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Functional Overview

3. To change the value of the highlighted bit, select either 1 or 0.

Each time you select 1 or 0, the highlighted bit is changed and

the highlight moves to the next bit.

4. To select a different bit for editing, select either the right or left

arrow to move the highlight. When the desired bit is highlighted,

select either 1 or 0.

5. When you are finished editing the byte, select DONE. This enters

the changes to the byte and exits edit mode.

Change the value

of the bit by

selecting one of

these choices.

Change the

highlighted bit by

selecting one of

these choices.

Select the bit to edit by

Select DONE when you are

finished editing.

using the knob.

Figure 2–17: Editing a Byte

Entering Text

Several parameters, such as file names, operator prompts, and path

trace messages, consist of text strings. You can set text strings to

preset choices or enter your own text string. When you highlight a

text parameter using the knob, the choices at the right side of the

display change to present predefined text strings (if appropriate) and

the option to edit the text string (see Figure 2–18).

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Functional Overview

Select the text string to edit by

using the knob.

Select EDIT TEXT to

edit the specified

text string.

Figure 2–18: Selecting a Text String for Editing

To edit a text string:

1. Select the text string by turning the knob until the desired text

string is highlighted (see Figure 2–18).

2. Select EDIT TEXT. This places the CTS 710 into edit mode.

When in edit mode, the choices along the right side of the display

change (see Figure 2–19). In edit mode, the status line at the top

of the display is replaced with a line that displays the characters

available for placing into the text string. (Some characters

available for message text are not available for file names.)

3. To change the highlighted character or enter a new one, select the

character to enter by turning the knob.

4. To enter the selected character, select Enter <character>.

To delete a character already entered, use the arrows to highlight

the character. Select Delete to delete the character.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–22

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Functional Overview

5. When you are finished editing the text string, select DONE.

The characters available depend on

Turning the knob selects the

character to be entered.

the text string being edited. The

characters used for file names are a

subset of the characters available for

message text.

Select this choice to enter

the selected character.

Select this choice

to delete the

selected character.

Select either of

these choices to

move the

highlight within

the text string.

Select DONE when you

are finished editing text.

The highlighted character is the

character that will be changed

when Enter ! is selected

Figure 2–19: Editing a Text String

Working with the Disk Drive

Use the disk drive in the CTS 710 to save instrument setups, pass/fail

tests, measurement results and measurement histories. The CTS 710

reads disks formatted in MS-DOS format. It reads only 1.44 MB

disks. The CTS 710 does not format disks. Files written to disk

consist of four types, as shown in Table 2–2.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Functional Overview

Table 2–2: CTS 710 Disk File Types

File Type

Description

File Extension

Instrument Setups

Complete description of instru- .SET

ment settings

Pass/Fail Tests

Complete description of instru- .TST

ment settings, operator

prompts, and Fail If conditions

Measurement Results

An ASCII file listing the results .RES

of a test

Measurement History

Binary file containing the

history of test results

.HIS

The CTS 710 creates two files (with extensions .RES and .HIS)

when you save test results.

The CTS 710 displays only file names with the extensions shown in

Table 2–2. Disk files with any other extensions do not appear in file

name displays.

Reading Files on Disk

You can display disk file names in three places: the RECALL

INSTRUMENT SETUPS page and the RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS

page of the TEST SETUPS menu, and the RECALL RESULTS page

of the RESULTS menu.

To view instrument setups files on a disk:

1. Insert the disk into the disk drive.

2. Press the TEST SETUPS front-panel button to display the TEST

SETUPS menu.

3. Select the RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS page.

4. Select Disk to display the instrument setups on disk.

To view pass/fail files on a disk:

1. Insert the disk into the disk drive.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–24

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Functional Overview

2. Press the TEST SETUPS front-panel button to display the TEST

SETUPS menu.

3. Select the RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS page.

4. Select Disk to display the pass/fail tests on disk.

To view test results files on a disk:

1. Insert the disk into the disk drive.

2. Press the RESULTS front-panel button to display the RESULTS

menu.

3. Select the RECALL RESULTS page.

4. Select Disk to display the test results files on disk.

NOTE. Disk operations may take several seconds if there are many

files on the disk. The light on the front of the disk drive turns off

when the disk operation is complete.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Functional Overview

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–26

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tutorial

The tutorial acquaints you with the features of the CTS 710 by

having you run a test while you explore specific features of the

CTS 710. For full details on how to use the CTS 710, refer to

Reference.

The tutorial presents procedures in tables. Perform the procedure by

reading from left to right in the table (see example below). The word

none in a cell indicates that no action is required.

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Begin here with

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Step 7

Step 6

Step 8, CTS 710

instruction is

complete

Some procedures require several iterations of highlighting parame-

ters and selecting choices. Some procedures may require more than

one menu button or menu page selection as well.

Before Turning On the CTS 710

This tutorial describes how to perform a bit-error rate (BER) test on

an STS-1 signal. To perform the tutorial, you need a 75 W coaxial

cable with BNC connectors on each end. This tutorial assumes you

have set up the CTS 710 as described in First Time Operation, on

page 1–3.

To set up your CTS 710 for the tutorial, perform these steps:

H Check that the CTS 710 is turned off. If it is on, you can put it in

standby mode by pressing the ON/STBY button.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tutorial

Connect the coaxial cable between the TRANSMIT and RECEIVE

BNC connectors on the front panel (see Figure 2–20).

CTS 710 SONET Test Set

75 W Coaxial Cable

Figure 2–20: Setup for the Tutorial

Press the ON/STBY button to turn on the CTS 710.

The CTS 710 performs its power-on self test and then displays the

TRANSMIT menu.

Before proceeding with the tutorial, initialize the CTS 710 as

follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

RECALL

INSTRUMENT

SETUPS

DEFAULT

FACTORY

SETTINGS

Recall Setup

Setting Transmit Parameters

Before beginning the BER test, set the transmit and receive

parameters.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–28

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tutorial

To set the transmit and receive parameters:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

STS-3

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Transmit Rate

(see Figure 2–21)

Figure 2–21: The TRANSMIT SETTINGS Page of the TRANSMIT Menu

Note that as soon as you changed the transmit rate that the red

ERROR light on the front panel came on and the red LOS, LOF, and

LOP status lights came on (also, NO SIG appeared next to the

incoming-signal icon at the top of the display). The lights turned on

because you can set the transmit and receive settings independently

and right now the receive section is still set to STS-1. You will

change the receive rate later in this tutorial.

An STS-3 signal is made up of three STS-1 signals. The CTS 710

can test only one signal at a time; therefore, you must specify which

of the three signals that make up the STS-3 signal you wish to test.

This tutorial has you test the second signal. The signal to be tested is

identified on the STS Under Test line.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tutorial

To specify which signal, or STS, to test:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

STS Under Test

To set the mapping and the test pattern:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Mapping

No Mapping

(Equipped)

Test Pattern

PRBS 2^20–1

Setting Receive Parameters

You can set receive parameters two ways. The first way is to set the

parameters individually: display the RECEIVE menu and set each

parameter manually on the RECEIVE SETTINGS page. The second

way is to couple the receive settings to the transmit settings. To do

this, use the Tx/Rx Settings line on the TRANSMIT SETTINGS

page. (The Tx/Rx Settings line appears on both the TRANSMIT

SETTINGS page and the RECEIVE SETTINGS page. To couple

transmit settings to the receive settings, you would use the Tx/Rx

Settings line on the RECEIVE SETTINGS page.)

To couple the receive settings to the transmit settings:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Tx/Rx Settings

Coupled

As soon as you select Coupled, the red error light turns off and the

icon in the status area changes to indicate the Tx/Rx Settings are

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–30

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tutorial

coupled. However, note that the yellow history light remains on as an

indication that an error has occurred.

Press CLEAR HISTORY to clear the error history light.

When the Tx/Rx Settings parameter is set to Coupled, all parameter

settings on the RECEIVE SETTINGS page transfer to the TRANS-

MIT SETTINGS page. Thereafter, any change to either page affects

both pages as long as Tx/Rx Settings is set to Coupled.

Setting the Test Time

Before beginning the BER test, you must specify the duration of the

test.

To set the duration of the test:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

(see Figure 2–22)

TEST CONTROL

Test Duration

15 min

Figure 2–22: The TEST CONTROL Page of the UTILITY Menu

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tutorial

Where Test Results Are Displayed

Once you have set the transmit and receive parameters and the test

time, you can begin the test. However, before starting the test, look

at the RESULTS menu where the results of the test appear.

To display the RESULTS menu:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RESULTS

none

The TEST SUMMARY page contains a summary of the current or

most recent test (see Figure 2–23). Just below the menu name is

information about the current or most recent test. If the test detected

no alarms or errors, the CTS 710 displays the message No Alarms

No Errors.

Figure 2–23: The TEST SUMMARY Page of the RESULTS Menu

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–32

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tutorial

The RESULTS menu contains four pages on which results are

displayed: TEST SUMMARY, MAIN RESULTS, ERROR

ANALYSIS, and HISTORY GRAPHS. Select MAIN RESULTS to

see one way test results are displayed (see Figure 2–24).

Figure 2–24: The MAIN RESULTS Page of the RESULTS Menu

The MAIN RESULTS page contains a listing of the different errors

that can occur. Since you have not started your test yet, the values

are those of the last test run. To continue with the test setup, select

TEST SUMMARY.

Begin the Test

Note at the top of the display the message Measurements Stopped.

When you start the test, this message will change. To start the test,

press the front-panel START/STOP button.

Once a test starts, the display changes in two ways. First, the

message Running appears at the top of the display (see Figure 2–25).

This message line is always visible so you know that a test is

running, even if a page is displayed that doesn’t contain any

information about tests. Second, the test status indicator appears.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tutorial

There are two elements to the test status indicator. The text above the

bar graph indicates how long the test has been running. The text lists

the days, hours, minutes, and seconds the test has been running. The

bar graph indicates what percentage of the test is complete (except

when the test duration is set to continuous).

Figure 2–25: The Message Line and Test Status Indicator

Inserting Errors

Now that the test is running, you will insert some errors and see how

the CTS 710 responds. To set the error insertion parameters, first

display the ERRORS & ALARMS page as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

ERRORS &

ALARMS

none

(see Figure 2–26)

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–34

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tutorial

Figure 2–26: The ERRORS & ALARMS Page of the TRANSMIT Menu

There are two ways to insert errors into the transmitted signal. You

can insert errors one at a time or you can set a rate at which the

CTS 710 inserts errors automatically. Before inserting errors, you

must specify the type of error to be inserted. You specify the type of

error to be inserted with the Error type set to parameter.

To set the type of error to insert:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Error type set to

Path B3 BIP

The rate at which errors are inserted is specified on the Error rate set

to line. An error rate of None specifies that no errors are inserted

unless the INSERT ERROR button is pressed. Any error rate other

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tutorial

than None results in a continuous stream of errors being inserted into

the transmitted signal.

To insert a single error, press INSERT ERROR.

When you press the INSERT ERROR button the red ERROR light

flashes.

To insert a continuous stream of errors:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Error rate set to

1.0E-5

Note that the red ERROR light now stays on all the time; errors are

being detected continually.

To turn off the automatic error insertion:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

ERRORS &

ALARMS

Error Rate set to None

Now that errors are no longer being transmitted, the red ERROR

light has gone out, although the yellow history light is still on. To

clear the error history, press CLEAR HISTORY.

Adjusting Pointers

The CTS 710 enables you to adjust or move pointers. Note that

pointer movements are not necessarily errors. Pointer parameters are

set on the POINTERS & TIMING page of the TRANSMIT menu.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–36

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tutorial

To display the POINTERS & TIMING page:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

none

TRANSMIT

POINTERS &

TIMING

none

(see Figure 2–27)

Figure 2–27: The POINTERS & TIMING Page of the TRANSMIT Menu

Before adjusting a pointer, you must decide what mode of pointer

movement to use. You can change a pointer by adjusting the pointer

directly or by using frequency offset. The default mode is Pointer

Movements, which allows you to adjust pointers directly.

To specify how the pointer will be adjusted:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Pointer Control

Single

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tutorial

After selecting Single for pointer control, a message displays that

tells you how to adjust the pointer. Pointer movement alternates

between increment and decrement.

To adjust a pointer, press the front-panel POINTER ACTION

button.

Each time you press POINTER ACTION, a pointer adjusts and the

POINTER ACTION light turns on. Also, a message appears at the

top of the display that describes the type of pointer movement that

occurs. On this page you can also adjust frequency offset which may

cause a network element to generate pointer movements.

To see the pointer value changing:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RESULTS

MAIN RESULTS none

Pointers

Now press POINTER ACTION again.

To adjust a pointer using frequency offset:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

POINTERS &

TIMING

Pointer / Timing

Mode

Frequency Offset

After selecting Frequency Offset, note that the available parameters

change. When in Frequency Offset mode, the only parameters that

can be set are Offset Mode and Frequency Offset.

To change the frequency offset of the signal:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Frequency Offset Stress +4.6ppm

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–38

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tutorial

If the preset choices do not match what you need, use USER

DEFINED to define an alternative.

To define a specific frequency offset:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

USER DEFINED

When you select USER DEFINED, the knob is assigned to adjust the

frequency offset. Two choices are available in this mode: Coarse and

Fine (see Figure 2–28). Coarse adjusts the frequency offset by

10 ppm. Fine adjusts the frequency offset by 0.1 ppm. The larger the

value for frequency offset, the more often the pointer is adjusted.

Figure 2–28: Adjusting Frequency Offset Using the Knob

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tutorial

Use the knob to change the value of Frequency Offset; select any

value you wish. When you are finished selecting a frequency offset:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

DONE

To turn off frequency offset:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

POINTERS &

TIMING

Frequency Offset

Default 0ppm

Selecting Default 0ppm sets the Frequency Offset back to 0 ppm.

Viewing Transport Overhead

The CTS 710 allows you to view the transport overhead for the

transmitted or received signal. To view the transport overhead for the

transmitted signal:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

TRANSPORT

OVERHEAD

none

The first line of text under the menu name describes the signal being

received and the STS under test (see Figure 2–29).

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–40

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tutorial

Figure 2–29: The TRANSPORT OVERHEAD Page of the TRANSMIT

The Showing Overhead for parameter identifies which columns of

the transport overhead are displayed. To display the overhead for

other SPEs within the signal, select the appropriate choice.

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Showing

STS–1 #1

Overhead for

Editing the Transport Overhead

Except for certain reserved bytes, you can edit the bytes of the

transport overhead of the transmitted signal. Reserved bytes are

identified by asterisks (*) in the byte content area of the displayed

column.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tutorial

To edit a byte of the transport overhead:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

EDIT BYTE

S1 byte

Once you have selected EDIT BYTE, the CTS 710 enters the edit

mode (see Figure 2–30).

Figure 2–30: The Display in Edit Mode

To change the value of any bit within the byte, highlight the bit you

wish to change. To change the value of the highlighted bit, select

either 1 or 0. After you assign a value to the highlighted bit, the

highlight moves to the next bit to be edited.

Edit the S1 byte to read 10101010.

Select DONE when you have finished editing the byte.

You can assign preset values to the highlighted byte. For example,

rather than editing each bit of the byte as you just did, you could also

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–42

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tutorial

have selected Set to 10101010. To see that the CTS 710 is now

receiving the new value of the S1 byte:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

none

RECEIVE

TRANSPORT

OVERHEAD

none

Verify that the transport overhead for STS–1 #1 is displayed. If it is

not:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Showing

STS–1 #1

Overhead for

Look at the value of the S1 byte. You will see that it is 10101010, as

previously set.

Viewing Test Results

The test has been running for several minutes and errors have been

transmitted. To see the test results, you must display the RESULTS

menu. To display the RESULTS menu:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RESULTS

TEST SUMMARY none

none

The TEST SUMMARY page identifies the most common errors that

the CTS 710 has detected. You will see a line that identifies the

worst error rate detected and may find listings for other types of

errors (see Figure 2–31).

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tutorial

Figure 2–31: The TEST SUMMARY Page of the RESULTS Menu

The MAIN RESULTS page displays all the errors that have been

detected. It also displays the error ratio and the number of errored

seconds that have been logged (see Figure 2–32).

To display the MAIN RESULTS page:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

MAIN RESULTS none

none

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–44

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tutorial

Figure 2–32: The MAIN RESULTS Page of the RESULTS Menu

This completes the tutorial. For detailed information on CTS 710

capabilities, refer to Reference, starting on page 3–1.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tutorial

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

2–46

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Test Procedures

This section gives examples of how to set up and use the

CTS 710 SONET Test Set for several common telecommunication

network applications:

H Network continuity checking

H Transmission signal quality testing

H Fault tolerance testing

H Performance monitoring

Setting Up the CTS 710

This section presents setup instructions for the CTS 710 in tables.

Perform the steps reading from left to right in the table (see example

below). The word none in a cell indicates that no action is required.

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Begin here with

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Step 7

Step 6

Step 8, CTS 710

Setup is complete

Menu buttons are located on the instrument front panel. Select menu

pages with the buttons below the display. Use the knob to highlight a

parameter; then use the buttons at the right to select a choice. Many

setups require several iterations of highlighting parameters and

selecting choices. Some setups may require more than one menu

button or menu page selection as well.

The first step in each application setup initializes the CTS 710 to a

known state.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Test Procedures

Network Continuity Checking

With the AUTOSCAN feature of the CTS 710, it is easy to make a

quick continuity check. The continuity check verifies that a SONET

network element (NE), or portion of the network, is correctly set up

and provisioned and that the signal passes through intact. In this

example, the CTS 710 transmits an STS-3 signal into an NE. Then

the CTS 710 receives the output from the NE and verifies that all

three SPEs, including their payload patterns, are intact.

1. Connect the CTS 710 to the NE as shown in Figure 3–1.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set

All Signals are

STS-3

One or More SONET NEs

Figure 3–1: Setup to Check Network Continuity

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Test Procedures

2. Set up the CTS 710 as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

RECALL

INSTRUMENT

SETUPS

DEFAULT

FACTORY

SETTINGS

Recall Setup

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Transmit Rate

STS-3

3. Press the AUTOSCAN button. The receiver locks onto the output

from the NE, displays the signal structure, and shows information

about the content of STS #1.

4. To analyze the payload pattern, select Show Payload. The

CTS 710 detects a PRBS of length 2 –1.

5. Check the J1 Path Trace for any message.

6. Check the front-panel status lights to verify that there are no

errors, alarms, or failures.

7. Select EXIT to leave the AUTOSCAN dialog box.

8. To check STS #2, change the CTS 710 setup to:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

STS Under Test

9. Press the AUTOSCAN button.

10. Use the knob to select STS #2.

11. Repeat steps 4 through 7 of this procedure to verify the integrity

of STS #2.

12. Repeat steps 8 through 11 for the remaining STSs in the SONET

signal.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Test Procedures

Transmission Signal Quality Testing

Measuring Bit Error Rate

The bit error rate (BER) test is one of the best ways to measure the

quality of a SONET transmission link. You can use the CTS 710 to

make a BER test on a two-way link that is connected in a loop-back

configuration. If this is a test you perform often, save it as a pass/fail

test for easy recall.

1. Connect the CTS 710 to a network as shown in Figure 3–2.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set

All Signals are

STS-1

One or More SONET NEs

Figure 3–2: Setup to Check a Transmission Link

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Test Procedures

2. Set up the CTS 710 as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

RECALL

INSTRUMENT

SETUPS

DEFAULT

FACTORY

SETTINGS

Recall Setup

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Transmit Rate

STS-1

Mapping

Bulk Fill

No Mapping

(Equipped)

Tx/Rx Settings

Coupled

15 Minutes

Errors

TEST SETUPS

RESULTS

TEST CONTROL Test Duration

MAIN RESULTS none

3. Press the START/STOP button.

4. While the test is running, the CTS 710 counts errors and errored

seconds and then calculates the error ratio for each error type.

5. After 15 minutes have elapsed, the test stops automatically and

the measured results are held on the MAIN RESULTS page until

another test is started.

6. When the test is complete, you can store the test results to disk or

print out a hardcopy. To save the test results to disk, you must

enter a name for the disk file as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RESULTS

SAVE RESULTS Name

EDIT NAME

7. Enter an eight-character name for the file.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Test Procedures

8. If you wish, you can also enter a description of the test results by

highlighting Description and selecting EDIT TEXT.

9. Save the test results to disk as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Save to Disk

Save Current

Testing Mapping and Demapping

To test that a DS1 signal is correctly mapped into a SONET signal,

you would use a Bit Error Rate test. However, testing mapping/de-

mapping requires a different test setup than that described on

page 3–4.

1. Connect the CTS 710 to an Add/Drop Multiplexer (ADM) as

shown in Figure 3–3.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set

DS1

STS–1

DS1 Add/Drop

Multiplexer

Figure 3–3: Setup to Test Mapping and Demapping

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Test Procedures

2. Set up the CTS 710 as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

RECALL

INSTRUMENT

SETUPS

DEFAULT

FACTORY

SETTINGS

Recall Setup

TRANSMIT

RECEIVE

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Transmit Rate

DS1

RECEIVE

SETTINGS

Receive Rate

STS-1

Mapping

VT1.5 Async

VT Under Test

Set to match how

the NE is

provisioned

Payload

DS1 Unframed

15 Minutes

Errors

TEST SETUPS

RESULTS

TEST CONTROL Test Duration

MAIN RESULTS none

3. Press the START/STOP button.

While the test is running, the CTS 710 counts errors and errored

seconds and then calculates the error ratio for each error type.

After 15 minutes have elapsed, the test stops automatically and the

measured results are held on the MAIN RESULTS page until another

test is started.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Test Procedures

4. When the test is complete, you can store the test results to disk or

print out a hardcopy. To save the test results to disk, you must

enter a name for the disk file as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RESULTS

SAVE RESULTS Name

EDIT NAME

5. Enter an eight-character name for the file.

6. If you wish, you can also enter a description of the test results by

highlighting Description and selecting EDIT TEXT.

7. Save the test results to disk as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Save to Disk

Save Current

Fault Tolerance Checking

Fault tolerance testing (sometimes called stimulus/response testing or

stress testing) is used to ensure that a network responds correctly to

various fault conditions. Though there are many additional fault

conditions you can test with the CTS 710, this section covers three

common examples:

H Response to errors and alarms

H Response to pointer movements

H Response to line frequency offset

Response to Errors and Alarms

This example uses two CTS 710s to simultaneously check the

upstream and downstream responses to an error or alarm condition.

You can use a single CTS 710 to do the same thing by alternately

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Test Procedures

connecting the upstream and downstream signals to the RECEIVE

input.

Table 3–1 shows the responses expected from Line Terminating

Equipment (LTE), such as an STS-3/STS-1 multiplexer, when

presented with three possible error and alarm conditions.

Table 3–1: LTE Responses to Errors and Alarms

Transmitted Error or

Alarm

Expected Upstream

Response

Expected Down-

stream Response

Section B1 Error

LINE AIS

Line FEBE

LINE FERF

none

PATH AIS

PATH FERF

1. Connect two CTS 710s to an LTE as shown in Figure 3–4.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set

All Signals are

STS-1

Downstream

LTE

Upstream

Figure 3–4: Setup to Check Error and Alarm Response

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Test Procedures

2. To check the LTE response to a Section B1 error, set up the

upstream CTS 710 as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

RECALL

INSTRUMENT

SETUPS

DEFAULT

FACTORY

SETTINGS

Recall Setup

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Transmit Rate

STS-1

Tx/Rx Settings

Error Type

Coupled

TRANSMIT

RESULTS

ERRORS &

ALARMS

Section B1 BIP

Error Rate set to 1.0E–5

MAIN RESULTS none Errors

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Test Procedures

3. Set up the downstream CTS 710 as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

RECALL

INSTRUMENT

SETUPS

DEFAULT

FACTORY

SETTINGS

Recall Setup

RECEIVE

RESULTS

RECEIVE

SETTINGS

Receive Rate

STS-1

Errors

MAIN RESULTS none

4. Press the START/STOP buttons on both the upstream and

downstream CTS 710s so that the START/STOP lights are on.

5. Verify that Line FEBE errors are counted in the MAIN RESULTS

display of the upstream CTS 710.

6. Verify there are no errors counted in the MAIN RESULTS display

of the downstream CTS 710.

7. Press the START/STOP buttons on both the upstream and

downstream CTS 710s so that the START/STOP lights are off.

8. To check the LTE response to a LINE AIS alarm, change the

upstream CTS 710 as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

ERRORS &

ALARMS

Error Rate set to None

Transmit Alarm

set to

LINE AIS

Errors

RESULTS

MAIN RESULTS none

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Test Procedures

9. Change the downstream CTS 710 as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

TRANSPORT

OVERHEAD

none

10. Press the START/STOP buttons on both the upstream and

downstream CTS 710s so that the START/STOP lights are on.

11. Verify that LINE FERF alarm seconds are counted in the MAIN

RESULTS display of the upstream CTS 710.

12. With the downstream CTS 710, verify that the displayed K1 or

K2 bytes are not all zeros.

13. Press the START/STOP buttons on both the upstream and

downstream CTS 710s so that the START/STOP lights are off.

14. To check the LTE response to a PATH FERF alarm, change the

upstream CTS 710 as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

ERRORS &

ALARMS

Error Rate set to None

Transmit Alarm

set to

PATH FERF

Alarms

RESULTS

MAIN RESULTS none

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Test Procedures

15. Change the downstream CTS 710 as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RESULTS

MAIN RESULTS none

Alarms

16. Press the START/STOP buttons on both the upstream and

downstream CTS 710s so that the START/STOP lights are on.

17. Verify that the PATH FERF light is on, on the downstream

CTS 710.

Response to Pointer Movements

Pointers allow the SONET network to multiplex signals from

independent sources, even if the signal clock rates differ slightly

from each other. Within the allowed range, pointer movements

should have no adverse affect on the performance of the network.

This example transmits a signal with frequent pointer movements to

an NE and checks that the downstream signal is error free.

1. Connect the CTS 710 to an NE as shown in Figure 3–5.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Test Procedures

CTS 710 SONET Test Set

All Signals are

STS-3

Figure 3–5: Setup to Check Pointer Movements

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Test Procedures

2. Set up the CTS 710 as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

RECALL

INSTRUMENT

SETUPS

DEFAULT

FACTORY

SETTINGS

Recall Setup

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Transmit Rate

STS-3

Tx/Rx Settings

Pointer Control

Coupled

TRANSMIT

RESULTS

POINTERS &

TIMING

Continuous

MAIN RESULTS none

Errors

3. Press the START/STOP button on the CTS 710 so that the

START/STOP light is on.

4. Verify that there are no errors in the MAIN RESULTS display.

When the front-panel ERROR light is not on, it also indicates

there are no errors in the received signal.

5. To check for received pointer movements, change the CTS 710

setup as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RESULTS

MAIN RESULTS none

Pointers

6. Verify that the CTS 710 is counting positive pointer justifications.

Depending on the clock rate of the NE, some negative pointer

justifications are also possible.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Test Procedures

Response to Line Frequency Offset

Pointers also accommodate differences in line frequency from one

NE to another. In this example, the CTS 710 transmits a signal at an

offset line frequency to an NE and measures the response.

1. Connect the CTS 710 to an NE as shown in Figure 3–6.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set

All Signals are

STS-3

Figure 3–6: Setup to Check Line Frequency Offset Response

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Test Procedures

2. Set up the CTS 710 as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

RECALL

INSTRUMENT

SETUPS

DEFAULT

FACTORY

SETTINGS

Recall Setup

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Transmit Rate

STS-3

Tx/Rx Settings

Coupled

TRANSMIT

RESULTS

POINTERS &

TIMING

Pointer/Timing

Mode

Frequency Offset

Offset Mode

Line

Frequency Offset Stress +4.6 ppm

MAIN RESULTS none Errors

3. Press the START/STOP button on the CTS 710 so that the

START/STOP light is on.

4. Verify that there are no errors in the MAIN RESULTS display.

When the front-panel ERROR light is not on, it also indicates

there are no errors in the received signal.

5. To check that the NE is generating pointer movements, change

the CTS 710 setup as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RESULTS

MAIN RESULTS none

Pointers

6. Verify that negative pointer justifications are being counted.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Test Procedures

Performance Monitoring

When a new line is installed you may want to monitor performance

for a day or so to be sure it is operating correctly. Or, if problems are

suspected on a line, you may want to run a long test to determine the

cause of the problem. In either case, the CTS 710 makes it easy to

monitor an electrical or optical line without the need for splitters.

During a test, the CTS 710 simultaneously takes all performance

measurements, analyzes the results according to the T1M1.3

standard, and displays the measurements and analysis in your choice

of three formats:

H In a brief summary

H In detail by type (error, alarm, failure)

H In detail by layer (section, line, path)

In this example, the CTS 710 is placed directly in line with a live

optical signal to monitor performance in an unintrusive mode

(Through Mode).

1. Connect the CTS 710 in line with an optical signal as shown in

Figure 3–7.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Test Procedures

CTS 710 SONET Test Set

All Signals are OC-3

Figure 3–7: Setup to Monitor Performance

2. Set up the CTS 710 as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

RECALL

INSTRUMENT

SETUPS

DEFAULT

FACTORY

SETTINGS

Recall Setup

RECEIVE

TRANSMIT

RESULTS

RECEIVE

SETTINGS

Receive Rate

Tx/Rx Settings

none

OC-3

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Through Mode

Section Analysis

ERROR

ANALYSIS

3. Press the START/STOP button on the CTS 710 so that the

START/STOP light is on.

4. As the test is running, the analysis of Section errors continually

updates. You can also look at the analysis of Line, Path, or

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Test Procedures

Payload errors by pressing the buttons corresponding to those

choices.

5. To see network performance data since the start of the test

presented in graphical form, change the CTS 710 setup as

follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RESULTS

HISTORY

GRAPHS

none

6. The CTS 710 history graphs can cover a time span up to

72 hours. You can choose history graphs of the measured

performance indicators in the following categories:

H Error count (any error you choose)

H Errored seconds (any error you choose)

H Pointer justifications

H Pointer value

H All failures

H All alarms

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Test Procedures

7. For example, to change the bottom graph to display the history of

Path B3 Errored Seconds, change the CTS 710 setup as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RESULTS

HISTORY

GRAPHS

none

Change Bottom

turn the knob to

Path B3 Errored

select the desired Secs

graph

Select Graph

8. Turning the knob moves the cursor from one bar to the next. The

specific measurement values at the cursor location are shown in

the display.

9. Once the graph fills the width of the display, you can pan through

the entire test using the knob.

10. You can compress or expand the time scale with the Zoom Out or

Zoom In action buttons. Press the button next to Zoom Out to

change the time scale to 5 minutes per bar.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Test Procedures

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–22

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Test Control Parameters

This section describes how to set the duration for a test, the

resolution of the test history, and how to start and stop a test. It also

lists parameters that cannot be adjusted during a test and other

actions that cannot be performed while a test is running.

Setting the Test Time Duration

Before running a test, you must specify how long the test will run.

The default test duration is continuous, which means a test runs until

you stop it with the START/STOP button.

To set the duration of a test:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

TEST CONTROL Test Duration

(see Figure 3–8)

5 min

15 min

1 hour

Continuous

USER DEFINED

H Select Continuous to set the test to run until the START/STOP

button is pressed. If you select Continuous, the CTS 710

accumulates measurements from the time you start the test until

the time you stop the test.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Test Control Parameters

Once the test duration is set, any time a test is started it will run for

the time specified on the Test Duration line.

NOTE. If an instrument setup or pass/fail test is recalled from memory

or disk, it overwrites the test duration specified on the TEST TIME

page.

Figure 3–8: The Test Control Page

Setting a Unique Test Time Duration

To set a test duration time other than the three choices presented, use

the USER DEFINED choice.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–24

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Test Control Parameters

To set a unique test duration:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

TEST CONTROL none

USER DEFINED

(see Figure 3–9)

Day

Hour

Minute

Second

H Select Day, Hour, Minute, or Second as appropriate, then use

the knob to set the duration of the selected period. Set each

choice as necessary.

H Select DONE when finished setting the duration to enter the

specified test duration.

Figure 3–9: Setting a USER DEFINED Test Duration

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Test Control Parameters

Table 3–2 lists the range limits for the test duration.

Table 3–2: Test Duration Limits

Choice

Range

Increment

Day

0 to 99

Hour

0 to 23

0 to 59

Minute

Second

NOTE. Although a test can be set to run up to 99 days, 23 hours, 59

minutes, and 59 seconds, only results from a limited period are saved

in memory. The period of test results saved is determined by the

History Resolution setting.

Setting the History Resolution

The history of test results can be recorded at two resolutions, either

1 minute or 15 minutes. At 1-minute resolution, 3 days worth of test

results can be recorded. At 15-minutes resolution, 45 days worth of

test results can be recorded.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–26

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Test Control Parameters

To set the history resolution of a test:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

TEST CONTROL History

Normal (1 min)

(see Figure 3–8

on page 3–24)

Resolution

Low (15 min)

Starting and Stopping a Test

To start or stop a test:

H Press START/STOP.

When a test starts, the light next to the START/STOP button turns on

and the status line displays the message, Running.

NOTE. Pressing START/STOP while a test is running stops the test

immediately, even if the test time has not expired.

While a test is running, the status line shows the elapsed time since

the test began. If a limited test duration has been set (any setting

other than Continuous), a bar graph indicates the current percentage

of test completion. Figure 3–10 shows the locations of the elapsed

time indicator and bar graph.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Test Control Parameters

Bar Graph shows

percent of test complete

Elapsed Time

since test started

Figure 3–10: Elapsed Time and Bar Graph Indicators

Making Changes While Running a Test

If you change instrument receive settings while a test is running, the

test is restarted. Error counts are cleared and the test begins again

using the new settings. You can change transmitter settings while a

test is running without restarting the test.

Actions You Cannot Perform While Running a Test

There are actions you cannot perform while a test is running (see

Table 3–3). You cannot recall instrument settings, pass/fail tests, or

results and you cannot save results while a test is running. If you try

to perform a recall while a test is running, you are warned that a

recall is not allowed while a test is running.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–28

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Test Control Parameters

Table 3–3: Actions You Cannot Perform While a Test is Running

Page

Action

TEST SETUPS

RECALL INSTRUMENT

SETUPS

Recall an instrument setup

RECALL PASS/FAIL

TESTS

Recall a pass/fail test

Recall previous results

RESULTS

RECALL RESULTS

SAVE RESULTS

Save current results to

disk

UTILITY

SELF TEST

Execute self test or diag-

nostics

AUTOSCAN

Autoscan the received

signal

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Test Control Parameters

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–30

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Working with Test Setups

This section describes how to save instrument setups to disk, recall

instrument setups, create pass/fail tests, and run a pass/fail test.

Instrument setups are files, stored in memory or on disk, that

completely describe how the CTS 710 is set up. You can use this

feature to ensure that every time a test is run, using an instrument

setup, that the CTS 710 is configured the same way, thus ensuring

consistent results. The disk file is an ASCII format file that consists

of SCPI commands. The disk file can be edited with any ASCII file

editor.

Pass/fail tests are tests that display a message indicating whether the

completed test encountered any of the specified failure conditions.

Up to four failure conditions can be specified in a pass/fail test.

Pass/fail tests can be configured to save test results to disk or to print

out the test results when the test completes.

Saving and Recalling Instrument Setups

Instrument setups are files stored in memory or on disk that define

how the CTS 710 is configured. If you regularly set up the CTS 710

in the same way, you can save the instrument settings in an

instrument setup. Then you can recall the instrument setup whenever

you want the CTS 710 configured a certain way. This capability

saves you time and minimizes the chances of error when setting up

the CTS 710 for standard tasks.

NOTE. Instrument setups saved to memory are retained when the

instrument is turned off. Instrument setups are retained in memory

even if power is removed from the CTS 710.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Working with Test Setups

Saving Instrument Setups

To save an instrument setup:

1. Set up the CTS 710 as desired. Set all instrument parameters as

required.

2. To save an instrument setup to disk, it must have a name. Enter a

file name as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

SAVE

INSTRUMENT

SETUPS

Name

SETUP_XX

(see Figure 3–11)

EDIT NAME

H If you wish to label the setup file as SETUP<Number>, you

can save time by selecting SETUP_XX. Once you select

SETUP_XX, select EDIT NAME and edit XX to the desired

number (or letter). Select DONE when you are finished

editing the setup name. The instrument setup name can be up

to eight characters long.

H Select EDIT NAME to enter a name other than SETUP_XX.

Select DONE when you are finished editing the setup name.

The instrument setup name can be up to eight characters long.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–32

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Working with Test Setups

Figure 3–11: The SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS Page

3. Enter a description of the instrument setup as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Description

EDIT TEXT

H Select EDIT TEXT to edit the description of the instrument

setup. The description can be up to 24 characters long. To

remove an existing description, select Clear or None.

4. Save the instrument setup to memory as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Save to Memory Memory n

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Working with Test Setups

5. Save the instrument setup to disk as follows:

H Insert a disk to store the file on, if one has not already been

inserted.

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Save to Disk

Save File

The instrument setup is saved to disk with the name specified on

the Name line. Status messages indicate the progress of the file

save. Once the file is written to disk, the CTS 710 reads the disk

directory and updates the file listing shown on the RECALL

INSTRUMENT SETUPS page.

Recalling Instrument Setups

To recall an instrument setup from memory:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

RECALL

INSTRUMENT

SETUPS

none

Memory

(see Figure 3–12)

none

Disk

select setup

Recall Setup

H Use the knob to select the desired instrument setup.

H To recall setups from memory rather than disk, select Memory to

highlight the Memory listing (see Figure 3–12).

H To recall setups from disk rather than memory, select Disk to

highlight the Disk listing.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–34

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Working with Test Setups

Figure 3–12: The RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS Page

The disk file listing displays up to six file names at a time. If

more than six files are on disk, the file listing automatically

scrolls when you turn the knob.

Recalling the Default Factory Setup

To recall the default factory setup (initialize the CTS 710):

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

RECALL

INSTRUMENT

SETUPS

none

Memory

(see Figure 3–12)

0. Default

Recall Setup

Recall the default settings whenever you want to restore the CTS 710

to a known state. For a listing of the factory default settings, see

page C–1.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Working with Test Setups

Deleting Instrument Setups from Disk

You can delete instrument setups from disk using the Delete File

action.

To delete an instrument setup from disk:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

RECALL

INSTRUMENT

SETUPS

none

Disk

(see Figure 3–12)

select setup

Delete File

H Use the knob to select the file to delete (see Figure 3–13).

Figure 3–13: Selecting a Disk File for Deleting

After you select Delete File, status messages appear indicating the

progress of the file deletion. When the file has been deleted, the file

listing updates.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–36

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Working with Test Setups

Pass/Fail Tests

A pass/fail test is an easy way to run a test and get a simple response

stating whether or not the CTS 710 encountered the specified errors

during the test. When a pass/fail test completes, the CTS 710

displays a message stating that either the test passed or failed.

Pass/fail tests are set up in the TEST SETUPS menu on the SAVE

PASS/FAIL TESTS page (see Figure 3–14). A pass/fail test consists

of instrument setup information and the parameters described in

Parameters of a Pass/Fail Test.

Figure 3–14: The SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS Page

Parameters of a Pass/Fail Test

A pass/fail test has the following parameters (some parameters are

optional):

H Name. The name of the test, a mandatory parameter. It can be up

to eight-characters long. The name of the test also serves as the

file name for the test when you save it to disk.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Working with Test Setups

NOTE. A pass/fail test can only be saved on disk. It cannot be saved

in memory.

H Description. An optional, 24-character field that describes the

test.

H Operator Start Prompt. An optional, 72-character field that is

displayed at the beginning of the test. You can use the operator

start prompt to provide instruction to the operator prior to the

beginning of the test.

H Test Duration. A required parameter that sets the length of the

test.

H Fail If conditions. The specific conditions that define whether a

test has failed.

H Operator End Prompt. An optional, 72-character field that is

displayed at the end of the test. You can use the operator end

prompt to provide instruction to the operator after the test is

completed.

H On Test Completion. A required parameter that defines the action

to be taken when a test completes.

Fail If Conditions

A Fail If condition is what determines if a test passes or fails. There

are three elements to a Fail If condition: condition type, specific

condition, and threshold (see Table 3–4).

The condition type describes the general condition that indicates a

test has failed. For each condition type (except None), there is list of

specific conditions and thresholds used to determine when a test

fails. None indicates that no condition type has been assigned.

The specific condition describes the type of failure used to determine

when a test fails. The specific conditions that define a failure depend

on the condition type (see Table 3–4).

The threshold is the level at which a test fails (see Table 3–4). For

example, for the condition types Alarm and Failure, the threshold for

any specific condition is Detected or Not Detected.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–38

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Working with Test Setups

H Detected. If the specified condition is detected, the test fails.

H Not Detected. If the specified condition is not detected, the test

fails.

Table 3–4: Fail If Conditions of a Pass/Fail Test

Condition Type

Specific Condition

Threshold

Alarm

Any

Detected/Not Detected

Line AIS

Line FERF

Path AIS

PATH FERF

VT AIS

Detected/Not Detected

VT FERF

DSn AIS

Yellow

Failure

Any

LOS

LOF

STS LOP

VT LOP

VT LOM

Pattern Sync

Any

Error Ratio

>1.0e–9

>1.0e–8

>1.0e–7

>1.0e–6

USER

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Working with Test Setups

Table 3–4: Fail If Conditions of a Pass/Fail Test (Cont.)

Condition Type

Specific Condition

Threshold

Section B1

>1.0e–9

>1.0e–8

>1.0e–7

>1.0e–6

USER

Line B2

>1.0e–9

>1.0e–8

>1.0e–7

>1.0e–6

USER

Path B3

>1.0e–9

>1.0e–8

>1.0e–7

>1.0e–6

USER

VT BIP

>1.0e–9

>1.0e–8

>1.0e–7

>1.0e–6

USER

VT FEBE

Payload BIT

DS3 Parity

>1.0e–9

>1.0e–8

>1.0e–7

>1.0e–6

USER

>1.0e–9

>1.0e–8

>1.0e–7

>1.0e–6

USER

>1.0e–9

>1.0e–8

>1.0e–7

>1.0e–6

USER

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–40

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Working with Test Setups

Table 3–4: Fail If Conditions of a Pass/Fail Test (Cont.)

Condition Type

Specific Condition

Threshold

DS1 CRC

>1.0e–9

>1.0e–8

>1.0e–7

>1.0e–6

USER

Error Count

Any

>10

>100

>1000

USER (0 – 10000)

Section B1

Line B2

Path B3

VT BIP

VT FEBE

>10

>100

>1000

USER (0 – 10000)

>10

>100

>1000

USER (0 – 10000)

>10

>100

>1000

USER (0 – 10000)

>10

>100

>1000

USER (0 – 10000)

>10

>100

>1000

USER (0 – 10000)

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Working with Test Setups

Table 3–4: Fail If Conditions of a Pass/Fail Test (Cont.)

Condition Type

Specific Condition

Threshold

Payload BIT

>10

>100

>1000

USER (0 – 10000)

DS3 Parity

DS1 CRC

Any

>10

>100

>1000

USER (0 – 10000)

>10

>100

>1000

USER (0 – 10000)

Errored Seconds

>10

>60

USER (0–10000)

Section B1

Line B2

>10

>60

USER (0–10000)

>10

>60

USER (0–10000)

Path B3

>10

>60

USER (0–10000)

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–42

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Working with Test Setups

Table 3–4: Fail If Conditions of a Pass/Fail Test (Cont.)

Condition Type

Specific Condition

Threshold

VT BIP

>10

>60

USER (0–10000)

VT FEBE

>10

>60

USER (0–10000)

Payload BIT

DS3 Parity

DS1 CRC

>10

>60

USER (0–10000)

>10

>60

USER (0–10000)

>10

>60

USER (0–10000)

Pointer

STS NDFs

STS Ptr. Justifys

>10

>60

USER (0–10000)

>10

>60

USER (0–10000)

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Working with Test Setups

Table 3–4: Fail If Conditions of a Pass/Fail Test (Cont.)

Condition Type

Specific Condition

Threshold

VT NDF’s

>10

>60

USER (0–10000)

VT Ptr. Justifys

>10

>60

USER (0–10000)

Creating a Pass/Fail Test

To create a pass/fail test:

1. Set up the CTS 710 as required to perform the desired test.

Set all transmit and receive parameters as necessary. When the

pass/fail test is recalled, the CTS 710 is set up exactly as it was

when the pass/fail test was saved.

2. Set the name of the pass/fail test as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

SAVE PASS/FAIL Name

TESTS

TEST_XX

(see Figure 3–14)

EDIT NAME

Clear

H If you wish to name the test file as TEST<Number>, you can

save time by selecting TEST_XX. Once you select

TEST_XX, select EDIT NAME and edit XX to the desired

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–44

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Working with Test Setups

number (or letter). Select DONE when you are finished

editing the setup name.

H Select EDIT NAME to enter a name other than TEST_XX

for the pass/fail test. Select DONE when you are finished

editing the test name.

H Select Clear to remove an existing name.

3. Enter a description of the pass/fail test as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

SAVE PASS/FAIL Description

TESTS

EDIT TEXT

None

Clear

H Select EDIT TEXT to enter a description of the test, up to

24 characters long. Select DONE when you are finished

editing the description.

H Select None if you do not want to use a description.

H Select Clear to remove an existing description.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Working with Test Setups

4. Enter an operator start prompt as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

SAVE PASS/FAIL Operator Start

TESTS Prompt

Default

Clear

Preview

EDIT TEXT

H Select Default to enter the default prompt TEST IS ABOUT

TO START!.

H Select Clear to remove any previously entered prompt text.

H Select Preview to see how the prompt text you have entered

appears in the pass/fail test dialog box. Select EXIT to

remove the preview.

H Select EDIT TEXT to enter an operator start prompt, up to

72 characters long. The prompt appears on the display as

three lines of 24 characters. Select DONE when you are

finished editing the prompt.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–46

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Working with Test Setups

5. Set the test duration as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

SAVE PASS/FAIL Test Duration

TESTS

5 min

15 min

1 hour

Continuous

USER DEFINED

H Select USER DEFINED to enter a time other than one of the

preset choices. The maximum duration is 99 days, 23 hours,

59 minutes, 59 seconds.

6. Highlight the first entry in the first column of the Fail If table

(see Figure 3–15). Select one of the preset choices to specify a

condition type.

Figure 3–15: Entering Fail If Conditions

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Working with Test Setups

7. Highlight the first entry in the second column (see Figure 3–15).

If you wish to specify a specific condition, select one of the

preset choices.

8. Highlight the first entry in the third column (see Figure 3–15).

Select one of the preset choices to set the threshold. Select USER

to specify a threshold other than one of the preset choices. (USER

is not available for Alarm or Failure condition types.)

9. Repeat steps 6 through 8 as necessary to specify additional Fail If

conditions. A maximum of four Fail If conditions can be

specified.

10. Enter an operator end prompt as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

SAVE PASS/FAIL Operator End

TESTS Prompt

Default

Clear

Preview

EDIT TEXT

H Select Default to enter the default prompt TEST HAS

ENDED!.

H Select Clear to remove any previously entered prompt text.

H Select Preview to see how the prompt text you have entered

appears in the pass/fail test dialog box. Select Exit to remove

the preview.

H Select EDIT TEXT to enter an operator end prompt, up to 72

characters long. The prompt appears on the display as three

lines of 24 characters. Select DONE when you are finished

editing the prompt.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–48

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Working with Test Setups

11. Specify the action to be taken when the test completes as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

SAVE PASS/FAIL On Test

TESTS Completion

Do Nothing

Print Summary

Save to Disk

H Select Do Nothing if you do not want any action taken at test

completion.

H Select Print Summary to print the test results when the test

completes.

H Select Save to Disk to create a disk file of the test results

when the test completes.

12. Save the pass/fail test to disk as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

SAVE PASS/FAIL Save to Disk

TESTS

Save File

Running a Pass/Fail Test

To run a pass/fail test:

1. Insert the disk containing the pass/fail test into the disk drive.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Working with Test Setups

2. Select the pass/fail test to run as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

RECALL

PASS/FAIL

TESTS

none

Disk

select disk file

name

Recall

NOTE. The Disk action displays only files with the extension .TST.

Selecting Recall begins the recall of the pass/fail test.

As the file recall begins, the TEST BEGIN dialog box appears

(see Figure 3–16). The first line of text in the dialog box is the

file name. The second line of text is the test description. The third

line informs the user that the file was recalled successfully. The

fourth line states how to begin the test. The fifth line is the

operator start prompt.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–50

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Working with Test Setups

Figure 3–16: The TEST BEGIN Dialog Box

3. To run the pass/fail test immediately, press START/STOP.

The pass/fail test will begin. When the test is completed, the

CTS 710 displays either TEST PASSED! or TEST FAILED!.

If you decide not to run the test, select EXIT from the dialog

box.

4. Select EXIT to remove the dialog box after the test completes.

5. Press RESULTS to see the detailed results of the test.

A test does not have to be run when it is recalled from disk. After the

TEST BEGIN dialog box appears, you can exit the dialog box by

selecting EXIT. You can then select the SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS

page and edit the parameters of the pass/fail test.

Changing an Existing Pass/Fail Test

You do not have to create a pass/fail test from the beginning every

time. You can recall an existing test, edit the parameters of the test,

and then save it under a new name.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–51

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Working with Test Setups

To change an existing pass/fail test:

1. Insert the disk containing the pass/fail test into the disk drive.

2. Select the pass/fail test to edit as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

RECALL

PASS/FAIL

TESTS

none

Disk

select disk file

name

Recall

NOTE. The Disk action displays only files with the extension .TST.

As the file recall begins, the TEST BEGIN dialog box appears

(see Figure 3–16).

3. Select EXIT to remove the dialog box.

4. Select SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS.

5. Edit the parameters of the pass/fail test as necessary.

6. If you want to save the edited pass/fail test under a different

name, change the Name of the test. You do not have to change

the name of the test file to save it to disk.

7. Save the pass/fail test to disk as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

SAVE PASS/FAIL Save to Disk

TESTS

Save File

H If you select Save File without changing the name of the file,

a Disk dialog box appears asking if you want to overwrite the

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–52

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Working with Test Setups

existing file. To overwrite the file, select Overwrite. If you

do not want to overwrite the file, select Cancel.

Deleting a Pass/Fail Test from Disk

Delete a pass/fail test from disk as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

RECALL

PASS/FAIL

TESTS

select file name

Delete File

H If necessary, select Disk from the list of actions to display the

names of the files on disk (see Figure 3–17).

Figure 3–17: Selecting a Pass/Fail Test for Deleting

After you select Delete, status messages appear indicating the

progress of the file deletion. The file list updates after the file is

deleted.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–53

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Working with Test Setups

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–54

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Checking Signal Status

This section describes how to use the CTS 710 to check signal status.

The CTS 710 continuously monitors the input signal for alarms,

errors, and failures and provides indicators for the current signal

status as well as indicating the history of the signal status.

Viewing Signal Structure

The quickest way to view the structure of a signal is to use

AUTOSCAN. AUTOSCAN analyzes the input signal and once a

signal is found, the CTS 710 synchronizes with the signal and

displays the structure of the signal.

To view signal structure using AUTOSCAN:

1. Connect a signal to the receiver input.

2. If a test is running, stop the test by pressing START/STOP.

3. Press the AUTOSCAN front-panel button.

While AUTOSCAN is running, several messages appear in the

display. While the CTS 710 searches for a signal it displays the

message: Please wait, autosetting to received signal. The CTS 710

scans all line rates and all receiver input connectors until it finds a

framed signal. When the CTS 710 finds a framed signal, the

instrument displays the message: Autosetting to received signal. If a

signal is not found, a message to that effect is displayed.

When the AUTOSCAN finishes, the CTS 710 displays the signal

structure in graphical form (see Figure 3–18). Use the knob to scroll

through the different active channels.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–55

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Checking Signal Status

Figure 3–18: The AUTOSCAN Dialog Box Showing Signal Structure

Viewing the Payload (Add/Drop/Test Option Only)

If the received signal uses tributary mapping, then Autoscan can

display the different tributaries within the STS.

To display the tributary payload, highlight an STS where VT 1.5 is

shown as the mapping and select the Show Payload choice (see

Figure 3–19).

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–56

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Checking Signal Status

Figure 3–19: Viewing Tributary Signal Structure

Determining the Payload Pattern and Framing (Add/Drop/Test Option

Only)

To search for a pattern in the data of the received signal or determine

the framing, select Analyze VT. After you select Analyze VT, the

CTS 710 scans the selected VT in the received signal to see if it

there is a pattern within the data and if the signal is framed. If a

pattern is found, it is displayed below the payload map on the Pattern

line (for example, PRBS 2^23–1). If the CTS 710 is unable to find a

pattern within the signal, it displays Unknown on the Pattern line.

The CTS 710 will display Unframed or Framed on the Framing line.

To scan every VT in the received signal, select Scan All VTs. As the

CTS 710 scans the signal, it will indicate for each VT whether it has

detected an alarm, whther the VT is equipped, and whether a test

pattern was found in the VT. The key which describes each of the

indicators is located in the lower, right corner of the AutoScan dialog

box (see Figures 3–19 and 3–20).

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–57

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Checking Signal Status

This shows that an alarm was

detected in the VT.

This means the VT is equipped. That is,

the signal label (in the V5 byte) is not zero,

indicating that the VT is probably carrying

traffic.

This means the transmitted test

pattern was found in the VT.

Figure 3–20: The Meaning of the Icons in the Autoscan Dialog Box

You exit the AUTOSCAN dialog box by selecting EXIT. When you

exit the AUTOSCAN dialog box, the receiver settings are set to

match the active channel most recently selected.

Printing the AutoScan Dialog Box

You can print the AutoScan dialog box by selecting Print. This

prints the displayed dialog box using the settings on the PRINTER

SETUP page of the UTILITY menu. The printout takes about two

minutes.

Viewing the Signal State

Three colors are used to indicate signal state: green, red, and yellow

(see Figure 3–21).

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–58

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Checking Signal Status

Yellow history lights

indicate an event has

occurred

Green lights

indicate the

condition is true

Clear History

button clears

Red lights indicate an

event is occurring now

history of events

Figure 3–21: Front-Panel Status Lights (with Add/Drop/Test Option

Installed)

H Green lights indicate the condition is true. See Table 3–5.

Table 3–5: Green Status Lights

Label on Light

Meaning if Light is On

SIGNAL PRESENT

A signal at the line rate specified by the Receive Rate

parameter is present.

PATTERN LOCK

Lock to a PRBS or fixed pattern has been achieved.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–59

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Checking Signal Status

H Red lights indicate the associated condition is valid. For example,

if the red light next to LOS is on, no signal is being received. See

Table 3–6.

H A yellow light is associated with each red light. The yellow lights

are turned on when an error, alarm, or failure condition first

occurs and then stay on to indicate the history even if the

condition goes away (see Table 3–6). Press the CLEAR

HISTORY button to clear the status history.

Table 3–6: Red and Yellow Status Lights

Label on Light

Meaning if Light is On

LOS

Loss of received signal.

LOF

LOP

Loss of frame of received signal.

Loss of STS or VT pointer for selected channel in

received signal.

LINE AIS

LINE FERF

PATH AIS

PATH FERF

VT AIS

A line alarm indication signal is being received.

A line far end receive failure code is being received.

A path alarm indication signal is being received.

A path far end receive failure signal is being received.

A tributary alarm indication signal is being received.

(Add/Drop/Test Option Only)

VT FERF

A tributary far end receive failure is being received.

(Add/Drop/Test Option Only)

DS1/DS3 AIS

DS1/DS3 YELLOW

ERROR

A tributary alarm indication signal is being received.

(Add/Drop/Test Option Only)

A tributary yellow signal is being received. (Add/

Drop/Test Option Only)

A bit, section, line, path, or VT parity error is detected;

or a line, path, or VT FEBE is being received.

POINTER ADJ

A pointer adjustment is being received.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–60

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Checking Signal Status

Extended Status

The red-yellow pair of ERROR lights on the front panel turn on

when a variety of error conditions exist on the line. For more detail

about the specific error types and frequency of occurrence, see the

TEST SUMMARY, MAIN RESULTS, and ERROR ANALYSIS

pages of the RESULTS menu. For more information on this topic,

see page 3–174.

Setting the Beeper

You can set a beeper to sound every time a red status light turns on.

To enable or disable the beeper:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

UTILITY

MISC SETTINGS Beeper

Off

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–61

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Checking Signal Status

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–62

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SONET Transmit Parameters

This section describes how to set the transmit rate, specify the STS

under test, set the payload mapping and content, and set the overhead

bytes for SONET signals.

The CTS 710 SONET Test Set contains independent transmitter and

receiver modules. One set of parameters controls the transmitter

module and another set controls the receiver module. You can set the

parameters that control the transmitter independently or you can

choose to link the parameters to the receiver settings.

Steps for Setting Parameters

The sequence of steps for setting transmit parameters varies with the

type of signal to be transmitted. The figures that follow show the

sequence of steps required to set the transmit parameters of a

SONET signal without a mapped tributary and a SONET signal with

a mapped tributary. See page 3–89 for details on setting tributary

signal parameters (for example DS3).

Set

Rate

Set

Clock

Set Signal

Structure

Specify STS

Under Test

Set

Mapping

Set Test

Pattern

Figure 3–22: Sequence for Setting SONET Signal Parameters

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–63

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters

Set

Rate

Set

Clock

Set Signal

Structure

Specify STS

Under Test

Set

Mapping

Set Payload

Set Background

Pattern

(Mapping = VT1.5

Set VT Under Test

(Mapping = VT1.5

Async only)

(Either external

add or internally

generated)

Set Test

Pattern

Async only)

Figure 3–23: Sequence for Setting SONET Signal Parameters When Mapping a

Tributary Signal

Setting the Transmit Rate

To set the transmit rate:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

as appropriate

Transmit Rate

(see Figure 3–24

on page 3–65)

H Select STS-1, STS-3, OC-1, OC-3, or OC-12 to transmit a

SONET signal.

H Select DS1 or DS3 to transmit a tributary signal. See page 3–89

for details on setting tributary signal parameters.

NOTE. Even though there are output connectors for both SONET and

tributary signals on the CTS 710 front panel, the CTS 710 can

transmit only one type of signal at a time.

Independent Transmit and Receive Settings

Generally, you can set the transmit and receive settings independent-

ly. For example, you can receive an electrical signal at the STS-1

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–64

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters

rate while simultaneously transmitting an optical signal at the OC-3

rate.

However, when working with tributary and DSn signals, the transmit

and receive parameters are not completely independent. You cannot

transmit a DS1 signal and receive a DS3 signal. When working with

tributary signals, you must set the mapping for transmit and receive

to the same value or to Bulk Fill No Mapping. For example, you

can transmit a DS1 signal and receive an OC-12 signal, but you must

set the mapping of the received signal to either Bulk Fill No

Mapping or DS1; it cannot be set to DS3.

Coupling Transmit and Receive Settings

If your application requires that the transmit settings and receive

settings be identical, you can save time by coupling them together.

After they are coupled, any change you make to a parameter on the

TRANSMIT SETTINGS page will also be made to the correspond-

ing setting in the RECEIVE SETTINGS page of the RECEIVE

menu. The inverse is also true.

Available SONET

Transmit rates

Figure 3–24: SONET Transmit Rates

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–65

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters

To couple the transmit and receive settings together from the

TRANSMIT SETTINGS page:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Tx/Rx Settings

Coupled

NOTE. When settings are coupled from the TRANSMIT SETTINGS

page, the receive parameters are changed to match the transmit

parameters. Conversely, when settings are coupled from the

RECEIVE SETTINGS page, the transmit parameters are changed to

match the receive parameters.

Notice that the signal status icons, in the upper-right corner of the

display, changed to reflect the coupling of the settings.

To change transmit and receive settings so that they are no longer

coupled:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Tx/Rx Settings

Independent

Notice that the signal status icons, in the upper-right corner of the

display, changed to indicate that the settings are no longer coupled.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–66

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters

Through Mode

Use Through Mode to monitor a signal without changing it. In

Through Mode, the rate and content of the transmitted signal is that

of the received signal. You cannot make changes to pointers or

timing, overhead bytes, or insert alarms or errors when the CTS 710

is in Through Mode. Through Mode does not perform clock recovery

before retransmitting the recovered signal. Through Mode is used for

nonintrusive performance monitoring of the active signal.

To put the CTS 710 into Through Mode:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Tx/Rx Settings

Through Mode

To indicate when the CTS 710 is in Through Mode, the transmit and

receive icons at the upper-right corner of the display have an arrow

linking them together and the parameters on the TRANSMIT

SETTINGS page are replaced by a message stating that the CTS 710

is in Through Mode (see Figure 3–25).

To take the CTS 710 out of Through Mode:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Tx/Rx Settings

Independent

Coupled

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–67

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters

Through Mode Icon

Figure 3–25: CTS 710 in Through Mode

Setting the Transmit Clock

To specify the transmit clock:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Transmit Clock

Internal

Recovered

BITS

H Select Internal to set the transmit clock to the internal clock.

H Select Recovered to use the clock recovered from an incoming

signal.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–68

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters

H Select BITS to use the clock signal from an external BITS

reference. Attach the external BITS reference to the BITS

connector on the rear panel.

Setting the Transmit Level

To specify the transmit level for electrical signals:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Transmit Level

High

XConnect

H Select High to set the line level to high.

H Select XConnect to set the line level to the cross-connect level.

Setting the Signal Structure

If you are transmitting an STS-3, OC-3, or OC-12 signal, you can

specify whether the signal consists of STS-1 payloads or STS-3c

payloads.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–69

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters

To specify the structure of an STS-3, OC-3, or OC-12 signal:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Signal Structure

3 x STS-1

1 x STS-3c

12 x STS-1

4 x STS-3c

H Select 3 x STS-1 to set the structure of an STS-3 or OC-3

signal to three STS-1 payloads.

H Select 1 x STS-3c to set the structure of an STS-3 or OC-3

signal to one STS-3c payload.

H Select 12 x STS-1 to set the structure of an OC-12 signal to

12 STS-1 payloads.

H Select 4 x STS-3c to set the structure of an OC-12 signal to

four STS-3c payloads.

Specifying the STS to Test

If you are using a line rate other than the basic-level rates (STS-1 or

OC-1), you must designate which STS to test.

To designate which STS to test:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

STS Under Test

as appropriate

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–70

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters

Setting the Payload Mapping

To set the payload mapping:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Mapping

Bulk Fill

No Mapping

(Equipped)

Bulk Fill

No Mapping

(Unequipped)

DS3

VT 1.5 Async

NOTE. Some payload mappings require options that might not be

installed in your CTS 710. Depending on the mapping you choose,

you might need to set additional parameters.

H Select Bulk Fill No Mapping (Equipped) to fill the whole

SPE with the test pattern specified and set the C2 byte to 1.

H Select Bulk Fill No Mapping (Unequipped) to fill the whole

SPE with the test pattern specified and set the C2 byte to 0.

An all-zeros pattern is the recommended test pattern for

unequipped SPEs.

H Select VT 1.5 Async to map an externally supplied or an

internally generated DS1 signal to the transmitted signal. See

Mapping a Tributary Signal on page 3–72 for details.

H Select DS3 to map an externally supplied or internally

generated DS3 signal to the transmitted signal. See Mapping a

Tributary Signal on page 3–72 for details.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–71

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters

Unequipped Payload Mapping

If you choose Bulk Fill No Mapping (Unequipped) payload mapping,

the CTS 710 places the unequipped code in byte C2. You can

transmit any of the pattern choices available with the Bulk Fill No

Mapping (Equipped) payload mapping. However, the default pattern

(all zeros prior to scrambling) is recommended.

When a SONET network element receives a signal with an

unequipped channel, the network element should pass the signal

through without making changes to it. This treatment should be

consistent from one end of the network to the other. A loopback at

the far end of the network would then allow a sole CTS 710 to

transmit a PRBS across the payload channel and verify the error

performance of the entire link from end to end.

Mapping a Tributary Signal (Add/Drop/Test Option Only)

To map a tributary signal, you first set the Mapping to the appropri-

ate tributary mapping (as described in the previous section). When

mapping a signal, you must also specify the payload. The payload

can be either an external signal connected to the appropriate IN

connector on the front panel or an internally generated signal.

Mapping a Tributary with VT1.5 Floating Async Payload Mapping

When you use the VT1.5 Floating Async mapping, you must also

specify the virtual tributary under test and payload (see Figure 3–26).

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–72

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters

Figure 3–26: Mapping a Tributary Signal

To configure the CTS 710 for mapping a signal:

1. Set the mapping as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Mapping

VT 1.5 Async

DS3

H Select VT 1.5 to specify VT1.5 Floating Asynchronous

mapping. An externally supplied or internally generated DS1

signal is mapped into the selected VT under test while the

other 27 VTs contain a background pattern.

H Select DS3 to map an externally supplied or internally

generated DS3 signal to the transmitted signal.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–73

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters

2. If the Mapping is set to VT1.5 specify the VT under test as

follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

VT Under Test

VT #1

VT #28

H Select VT #1 to specify the first virtual tributary.

H Select VT #28 to specify the last virtual tributary.

H Select Next or Previous to change the selection to the next

higher or next lower virtual tributary.

3. Specify the payload as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Payload

as appropriate

H Select DS1 Ext Add to map a DS1 signal, connected to the

DS1 IN connector on the CTS 710 front panel, into the

payload of the selected virtual tributary.

H Select DS1 Unframed to map an internally generated,

unframed DS1 signal into the payload of the selected virtual

tributary.

H Select DS1 SF (D4) to map an internally generated DS1

signal, with D4 SuperFrame framing, into the payload of the

selected virtual tributary.

H Select DS1 ESF to map an internally generated DS1 signal,

with Extended SuperFrame framing, into the payload of the

selected virtual tributary.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–74

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters

H Select DS3 Ext Add to map a DS3 signal, connected to the

DS3 Input connector on the CTS 710 front panel, into the STS

payload.

H Select DS3 Unframed to map an internally generated,

unframed DS3 signal into the STS payload.

H Select DS3 C–bit to map an internally generated DS3 signal,

with C-bit framing, into the payload of the selected virtual

tributary.

H Select DS3 M13 to map an internally generated DS3 signal,

with M13 framing, into the payload of the selected virtual

tributary.

Setting the Test Pattern

You can select a test pattern to transmit in the SPE.

To specify the test pattern to transmit:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

as appropriate

Test Pattern

H Select 1 in 8 to set the test pattern to 01000000.

H Select 3 in 24 to set the test pattern to

01000100 00000000 00000100.

H Select User Word 8 bit, User Word 16 bit, or User Word

24 bit to set a test pattern different from the preset choices. If

you choose User Word, the test pattern description changes to

display the byte selected.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–75

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters

If you select User Word 8 bit/16 bit/24 bit for the test pattern, set the

value of the User Word as follows:

1. Set the contents of the User Word Byte(s) as follows (see

Figure 3–27):

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Set to 00000000

Test Pattern

Set to 11111111

Default 10101010

EDIT BYTE/

Edit XX bits

2. Select EDIT BYTE/Edit XX bits to specify a value different

from the preset choices.

3. Select Predefined Patterns if you decide to use the standard

patterns.

4. Select DONE when you are finished editing the byte.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–76

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters

Figure 3–27: Editing the User Word Byte

Setting Overhead Bytes

To stress test a network, you sometimes need to simulate errors or

alarms. Use the controls on the ERRORS & ALARMS page of the

TRANSMIT menu to simulate errors or alarms. As an alternative,

you can edit the transport overhead and path overhead bytes directly

to simulate errors, alarms, and create other stress conditions. This

section describes how to use the TRANSPORT OVERHEAD and

PATH OVERHEAD pages to edit overhead bytes.

How to Edit an Overhead Byte

The following procedure applies to editing either transport overhead

or path overhead bytes. Transport overhead is given as an example.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–77

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters

To edit overhead bytes:

1. Display the transport overhead as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

TRANSPORT

OVERHEAD

Because only three columns of overhead are displayed at one

time, you must specify which columns you want to edit.

2. Select the columns you wish to edit as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Showing

as appropriate

Overhead for

3. Turn the knob to highlight the byte you want to edit. See

Figure 3–28.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–78

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters

Bytes you can

never edit

Cannot edit

because

alarm is set

Z2 byte

selected to

edit

Figure 3–28: Editing the Z2 Transmit Overhead Byte

There are several ways to edit the byte:

H Select Reset Overhead to set all bytes in the overhead to

their individual default values. However, Reset Overhead

does not remove simulated error conditions that have been

set using controls in the ERRORS & ALARMS page.

A simulated error condition overrides the default value of the

overhead byte that signals that particular error condition.

H Select Default (XXXXXXXX) to set the selected byte to its

default value. The specific default value depends on the

selected byte and on the rate and structure of the signal.

H Select EDIT BYTE to define the byte as a value different

from the preset choices.

4. To edit the selected byte to a value of your choice:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

EDIT BYTE

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–79

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters

H Define your own byte with the buttons next to 1 and 0. Use

the left and right arrow buttons to move the cursor from one

bit to the next. See Figure 3–29.

H When you finish editing the byte, select DONE.

Figure 3–29: Editing an Overhead Byte

Editing the V5 Byte

To edit the V5 byte (VT1.5 Mapping Only):

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

PATH

OVERHEAD

Overhead View

VT1.5 Overhead

Only bits 5, 6, and 7 (the signal label bits) of the V5 byte are

editable. See Table 3–7.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–80

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters

Table 3–7: Choices for Bits 5, 6, and 7 of the V5 Byte

Choice

Unequip (000)

Equipped (001)

Async (010)

Bit–Sync (011)

Byte–Sync (100)

Reserved (101)

TSS4 (110)

VT–AIS

Bytes You Cannot Edit

Certain bytes in the transport overhead and path overhead cannot be

edited in the TRANSPORT OVERHEAD or PATH OVERHEAD

pages. These uneditable bytes have calculated values that are based

on the payload and signal structure (see Table 3–8).

Table 3–8: Overhead Bytes That Cannot Be Edited

Overhead Byte

Function

Section level parity byte

Line level parity byte

Path level parity byte

Path status

H1, H2, H3

Identify location of payload

Multiframe indicator

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–81

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters

The bytes that cannot be edited are marked with a line of asterisks on

the TRANSPORT OVERHEAD or PATH OVERHEAD pages (see

Figure 3–28 on page 3–79).

In addition, there are bytes you may not be able to edit depending on

parameter settings in the CTS 710. As shown in Figure 3–28, a short

text string replaces the binary values in the byte field of the

TRANSPORT OVERHEAD and PATH OVERHEAD pages when a

byte cannot be edited. Table 3–9 shows the affected bytes, the text

string, and a description of the parameter setting that prevents the

byte from being edited.

Table 3–9: Bytes You Cannot Edit Due to Parameter Settings

Transport and

Path Overhead

Byte(s)

Text String that

Replaces the

Binary Values

Parameter Setting Affecting

Byte-Edit Capability

A1, A2

LOF SET

Loss of Frame Failure is being

simulated

D1, D2, D3

K1, K2

EXT ADD

Section Data Communication

Channel External Add is enabled

LAIS SET

FERF SET

EXT ADD

Line AIS is being simulated

Line FERF is being simulated

D4, D5, D6, D7,

D8, D9, D10, D11,

D12

Line Data Communication Chan-

nel External Add is enabled

FEBE SET

FERF SET

FEBE SET

Line FEBE is being simulated

Path FERF is being simulated

Path FEBE is being simulated

Path AIS is being simulated

All path overhead PAIS SET

bytes set to ones

Editing the J1 Path Trace Byte

The J1 Path Trace Byte carries a fixed-length, 64-byte string

intended for sending user messages. The Path Trace Byte is a string

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–82

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters

consisting of ASCII characters (rather than the ones and zeros used

to edit the other overhead bytes).

To edit the J1 Path Trace Byte:

1. Display the Path Trace Byte as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

PATH

OVERHEAD

J1 byte

Reset Overhead

Null Trace

Default Trace

User Trace

EDIT TRACE

The text string USER is shown in place of the actual byte value.

There are five ways you can change the Path Trace message.

H Select Reset Overhead to set all bytes in the path overhead to

their default values.

NOTE. Reset Overhead does not remove simulated error conditions

that have been set using controls in the ERRORS & ALARMS page.

H Select Null Trace to set all the J1 bytes in the string to the

null character.

H Select Default Trace to set the J1 byte string to the default

string “Tektronix CTS 710 SONET Test Set, hello how are

you?”

H Select User Trace to set the J1 byte string to a string you can

enter using the EDIT TRACE function.

H Select EDIT TRACE to define your own text string.

2. Select EDIT TRACE to edit the path trace message (see

Figure 3–30).

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–83

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters

The string can contain a maximum of 64 characters, including

spaces.

3. Select DONE when you have completed the entering string.

Figure 3–30: Editing the J1 Path Trace Byte

Adding DCC and User Channel Overhead Bytes

You can add data generated by an external protocol analyzer into the

Data Communication Channel (DCC) and User Channel. The data

from the protocol analyzer is added through the Overhead Add/Drop

Port located on the rear panel. See Appendix G for detailed

information on the port pin assignments.

To add external data into the DCC:

1. Connect an external protocol analyzer to the CTS 710 using the

Overhead Add/Drop Port on the rear panel of the CTS 710.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–84

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters

2. To configure the CTS 710 to add the external data bytes:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

TRANSPORT

OVERHEAD

External Add

None

D1–D3

D4–D12

H Select None if you do not want to add external data.

H Select D1–D3 to add data, generated by an external protocol

analyzer, to the D1–D3 bytes of the DCC.

H Select D4–D12 to add data, generated by an external protocol

analyzer, to the D4–D12 bytes of the DCC.

H Select F1 to add data, generated by an external protocol

analyzer, to the F1 byte of the DCC.

As soon as you select which bytes to add data to, the CTS 710

displays the words EXT ADD as the value for the selected bytes (see

Figure 3–31).

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–85

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters

Figure 3–31: Adding Data into the DCC

To add external data into the User Channel:

1. Connect an external protocol analyzer to the CTS 710 using the

Overhead Add/Drop Port on the rear panel of the CTS 710.

2. To configure the CTS 710 to add the external data byte:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

PATH

OVERHEAD

External Add

None

H Select None if you do not want to add external data.

H Select F2 to add data, generated by an external protocol

analyzer, to the User Channel.

As soon as you select F2, the CTS 710 displays the words EXT ADD

as the value for F2 (see Figure 3–32).

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–86

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters

Figure 3–32: Adding Data into the User Channel

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–87

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–88

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Tributary Signal Transmit

Parameters

This section describes how to set the transmit rate, transmit clock,

line code, framing, and test pattern for a tributary signal.

Steps for Setting Parameters

The sequence of steps for setting transmit parameters varies

depending on the type of signal to be transmitted. Figure 3–33 shows

the sequence of steps required to set the transmit parameters for a

tributary signal (for example, DS3).

Set

Rate

Set

Clock

Set Transmit

Line Code

Set

Framing

Set Test

Pattern

Figure 3–33: Sequence for Setting Tributary Signal Parameters

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–89

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters

Setting the Transmit Rate

To set the transmit rate:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

DS1

Transmit Rate

(see Figure 3–34)

DS3

H Select DS1 or DS3 to transmit a tributary rate signal.

NOTE. The CTS 710 can transmit only one signal rate at a time. The

CTS 710 can transmit either a SONET signal or a tributary signal,

but not both at the same time.

Independent Transmit and Receive Settings

Generally, you can set the transmit and receive settings independent-

ly. For example, you can receive an electrical signal at the STS-1

rate while simultaneously transmitting an optical signal at the DS1

rate.

However, when working with tributary and DSn signals, the transmit

and receive parameters are not completely independent. You cannot

transmit a DS1 signal and receive a DS3 signal. When working with

tributary signals, you must set the mapping for transmit and receive

to the same value or to Bulk Fill No Mapping. For example, you

can transmit a DS1 signal and receive an OC-12 signal, but you must

set the mapping of the received signal to either Bulk Fill No

Mapping or VT1.5; it cannot be set to DS3.

Coupling Transmit and Receive Settings

If your application requires that the transmit settings and receive

settings be identical, you can save time by coupling them together.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–90

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters

After they are coupled, any change you make to a parameter on the

TRANSMIT SETTINGS page will also be made to the correspond-

ing setting in the RECEIVE SETTINGS page of the RECEIVE

menu. The inverse is also true.

Available tributary

Transmit rates

Figure 3–34: Tributary Transmit Rates

To couple the transmit and receive settings together from the

TRANSMIT SETTINGS page:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Tx/Rx Settings

Coupled

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–91

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters

NOTE. When settings are coupled from the TRANSMIT SETTINGS

page, the receive parameters are changed to match the transmit

parameters. Conversely, when settings are coupled from the

RECEIVE SETTINGS page, the transmit parameters are changed to

match the receive parameters.

Notice that the signal status icons, in the upper-right corner of the

display, changed to reflect the coupling of the settings.

To change transmit and receive settings so that they are no longer

coupled:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Tx/Rx Settings

Independent

Notice that the signal status icons, in the upper-right corner of the

display, changed to indicate that the settings are no longer coupled.

Setting the Transmit Clock

To specify the transmit clock:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Transmit Clock

Internal

Recovered

External BITS

External DSn

H Select Internal to set the transmit clock to the internal clock.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–92

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters

H Select Recovered to use the clock recovered from an incoming

signal.

H Select External BITS to use the clock signal from an external

BITS reference. Attach the external BITS reference to the BITS

connector on the rear panel.

H Select External DSn to use an external DS1/DS3 clock. Attach

the clock to the external clock connector located on the rear

panel.

Setting the Line Clock Offset

To specify the line clock offset:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

LIne Clock Offset Max +100ppm

Stress +1.0ppm

Stress –1.0ppm

USER DEFINED

H Select USER DEFINED to specify a clock offset different from

the preset choices.

Setting the Transmit Line Code

To specify the transmit line code for the tributary signal:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Transmit Line

Code

as appropriate

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–93

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters

H Select AMI to set the line code to Alternate Mark Inversion.

H Select B8ZS to set the line code to Binary 8-Zero Substitution.

H B3ZS (Binary 3-Zero Substitution) is the only available line code

for the DS3 rate.

The line code available for selection depends on the selected

transmit rate. The available line codes and their associated rates are

listed in Table 3–10.

Table 3–10: Tributary Rate Line Codes

Transmit Rate

Line Codes Available

DS1

AMI

B8ZS

B3ZS

DS3

Specifying the Framing

The framing choices available depend on the selected transmit rate.

To set the framing for a DS1 signal:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Framing

DS1 Unframed

DS1 SF (D4)

DS1 ESF

H Select DS1 Unframed to transmit a signal without framing.

H Select DS1 SF (D4) to transmit a signal with Superframe

framing.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–94

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters

H Select DS1 ESF to transmit a signal with Extended Superframe

framing.

To set the framing for a DS3 signal:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Framing

DS3 Unframed

DS3 C–bit

DS3 M13

H Select DS3 Unframed to transmit a signal without framing.

H Select DS3 C–bit to transmit a signal with C–bit framing.

H Select DS3 M13 to transmit a signal with M13 framing.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–95

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters

Specifying the Test Pattern

You can select a test pattern to transmit in the tributary signal.

To specify the test pattern to transmit:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

PRBS

2^23–1

Test Pattern

PRBS

2^20–1

PRBS

2^15–1

QRSS

2^20–1

1 in 8

All Ones

All Zeros

User Word 8 bit

User Word 16 bit

User Word 24 bit

H Select QRSS 2^20–1 to send a Quasi-Random Signal Source

sequence as the test pattern (DS1 only).

H Select 1 in 8 to set the test pattern to 01000000.

H Select 3 in 24 to set the test pattern to

01000100 00000000 00000100.

H Select User Word 8 bit, User Word 16 bit, or User Word

24 bit to set a test pattern different from the preset choices. If

you choose one of the User Word choices, the test pattern

description changes to User Defined Byte.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–96

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters

If you select User Word 8 bit/16 bit/24 bit for the test pattern, set the

value of the User Word as follows:

1. Set the contents of the User Word as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Set to 00000000

Test Pattern

Set to 11111111

Default 10101010

EDIT BYTE/

Edit XX bits

2. Select EDIT BYTE/Edit XX bits to specify a value different

from the preset choices (see Figure 3–35).

3. Select Predefined Patterns if you decide to use the standard

patterns.

4. Select DONE when you are finished editing the byte.

Figure 3–35: Editing the User Word

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–97

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–98

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SONET Receive Parameters

This section describes how to manually set the receive line rate,

define the STS under test, set the payload mapping and content,

check the received optical signal power, and view the overhead

bytes.

The CTS 710 SONET Test Set contains independent transmit and

receive modules. One set of parameters controls the transmit module

and a separate set controls the receive module. You can set the

receive parameters independent of the transmit parameters or you

can choose to link them to the transmit settings.

Pressing AUTOSCAN sets the receive parameters automatically

based on the received signal.

Steps for Setting Parameters

The sequence of steps for setting receive parameters varies with the

type of signal to be received. Figure 3–36 shows the sequence of

steps required to set the receive parameters for a SONET signal

without demapping a tributary signal. Figure 3–37 shows the steps

required to set the receive parameters for a SONET signal when

demapping a tributary signal. See page 3–89 for details on setting

tributary signal parameters (for example DS3).

Set

Rate

Set Signal

Structure

Specify STS

Under Test

Set

Mapping

Set Test

Pattern

Figure 3–36: Sequence for Setting SONET Signal Parameters

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–99

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters

Set Level

(STS Rates

only)

Set

Rate

Set Signal

Structure

Specify STS

Under Test

Set

Mapping

Set Payload

Set VT Under Test

(Mapping = VT1.5

Async only)

Set Tributary Drop

(Mapping = VT1.5

Async, DS3 only)

(Mapping=

VT1.5 Async,

DS3 only)

Set Test

Pattern

Figure 3–37: Sequence for Setting SONET Signal Parameters When Demapping a

Tributary Signal

Setting the Receive Rate

To set the receive rate:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

SETTINGS

Receive Rate

as appropriate

(see Figure 3–38)

H Select STS-1, STS-3, OC-1, OC-3, or OC-12 to receive a

SONET signal.

H Select DS1, DS3, or DS3→DS1 to receive a tributary rate signal.

See page 3–121 for details on setting tributary signal parameters.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–100

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters

Available SONET

Receive Rates

Figure 3–38: SONET Receive Rates

Independent Receive and Transmit Settings

Generally, you can set the receive and transmit settings independent-

ly. For example, you can receive an electrical signal at the STS-1

rate while simultaneously transmitting an optical signal at the OC-3

rate.

However, when working with tributary signals, the receive and

transmit parameters are not completely independent. You cannot

receive a DS1 signal and transmit a DS3 signal. When working with

tributary signals, you must set the mapping for receive and transmit

to the same value or to Bulk Fill No Mapping. For example, you

can receive a DS1 signal and transmit an OC-12 signal, but you must

set the mapping of the transmitted signal to either Bulk Fill No

Mapping or DS1; it cannot be set to DS3.

Coupling Receive and Transmit Settings

If your application requires that the receive settings and transmit

settings be identical, you can save time by coupling them together.

After they are coupled, any change you make to a parameter on the

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters

RECEIVE SETTINGS page will also be made to the corresponding

setting in the TRANSMIT SETTINGS page of the RECEIVE menu.

The inverse is also true.

To couple the receive and transmit settings together from the

RECEIVE SETTINGS page:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

SETTINGS

Tx/Rx Settings

Coupled

NOTE. When settings are coupled from the RECEIVE SETTINGS

page, the transmit parameters are changed to match the receive

parameters. Conversely, when settings are coupled from the

TRANSMIT SETTINGS page, the receive parameters are changed to

match the transmit parameters.

To change receive and transmit settings so that they are no longer

coupled:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

SETTINGS

Tx/Rx Settings

Independent

Notice that the signal status icons, in the upper-right corner of the

display, changed to indicate that the settings are no longer coupled.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–102

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters

NOTE. When the incoming line rate changes, a valid LOS must occur

between the old and new line rates; otherwise, the CTS 710 might

lose pattern lock and display an LOS or LOF status. If this occurs,

reselect the correct Receive line rate after the change or initiate a

valid LOS (for example, disconnect and reconnect the received signal

or assert LOS at the source).

Setting the Receive Level

To specify the receive level for electrical signals:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

SETTINGS

Receive Level

XConnect

Low

High

Monitor

H Select XConnect to set the line level to the cross-connect level.

H Select Low to set the line level to low.

H Select High to set the line level to high.

H Select Monitor to set the line level to the monitor level.

Setting the Signal Structure

If you are receiving an STS-3, OC-3 or OC-12 signal, you can

specify whether the signal consists of STS-1 payloads or STS-3c

payloads.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters

To specify the structure of a received STS-3, OC-3, or OC-12 signal:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

SETTINGS

Signal Structure

STS-1

STS-3c

Specifying Which STS to Test

If you are using a line rate other than the SONET basic-level rates

STS-1 or OC-1, you must select one STS to test.

To designate which STS to test:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

SETTINGS

STS Under Test

as appropriate

Setting the Mapping

You can specify whether the payload contains live data or not. If you

know the mapping of the received signal, you can specify what the

mapping is on the RECEIVE SETTINGS page.

NOTE. The CTS 710 cannot demap a tributary signal and transmit a

tributary signal at the same time.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–104

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters

To specify the mapping of the received signal:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

SETTINGS

Mapping

Bulk Fill

No Mapping

(Equipped)

Bulk Fill

No Mapping

(Unequipped)

DS3

VT1.5

NOTE. Some mappings require options that might not be installed in

your CTS 710. Depending on the mapping you choose, you might

need to set additional parameters.

H Select Bulk Fill No Mapping (Equipped) to receive an SPE that

is filled with the test pattern specified (on the Test Pattern line)

and where the C2 byte is set to 1.

H Select Bulk Fill No Mapping (Unequipped) to receive an SPE

that is filled with the test pattern specified (on the Test Pattern

line) and where the C2 byte is set to 0.

H Select VT 1.5 Async to demap a DS1 signal from the received

signal. See Demapping a Tributary Signal for details.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters

NOTE. The CTS 710 will report errors incorrectly when the receive

mapping is set to VT 1.5 Async but the received signal does not

actually contain any tributary signals. For example, if the trans-

mitted signal is an STS-3 signal using a PRBS for the payload and

the receive mapping is set to VT 1.5 Async, the CTS 710 will report

errors for VT AIS, VT FERF, VT FEBE, VT BIP, and VT LOP. This

occurs only when the received signal does not contain a tributary

signal but the CTS 710 is configured to receive a signal that contains

a tributary. This applies only to CTS 710s with the Add/Drop/Test

Option.

H Select DS3 to demap a DS3 signal from the received signal. See

Demapping a Tributary Signal for details.

H Select DS3–>DS1 to demap a DS1 signal from the received

signal. See Demultiplexing a DS1 from a DS3 Mapped in a

SONET Signal for details.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–106

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters

Demultiplexing a DS1 from a DS3 Mapped in a SONET

Signal (Add/Drop/Test Option Only)

To demultiplex a DS1 signal from a SONET signal that uses DS3

mapping:

1. After setting the SONET signal mapping to DS3–>DS1 Demux,

specify the DS3 mapping as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

SETTINGS

DS3 Framing

DS3 C–bit

DS3 M13

2. Specify the DS1 User Test as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

DS1 Under Test

DS1 #1

DS1 #28

H Select DS1 #1 to specify the first DS1 signal.

H Select DS1 #28 to specify the last DS1 signal.

H Select Next to change the selection to the next higher DS1

signal.

H Select Previous to change the selection to the next lower DS1

signal.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters

3. Specify the DS1 Framing as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Framing

DS1 Unframed

DS1 SF (D4)

DS1 ESF

H Select DS1 Unframed to demultiplex an unframed DS1

signal or a DS1 signal whose framing is unknown.

H Select DS1 SF (D4) to demultiplex a DS1 signal in D4

Superframe format.

H Select DS1 ESF to demultiplex a DS1 signal in Extended

Superframe format.

4. To drop the DS1 signal to the front panel connectors:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Tributary Drop

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–108

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters

5. Specify the received test pattern as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

PRBS

Test Pattern

2^23–1

PRBS

2^20–1

PRBS

2^15–1

QRSS

2^20–1

All Ones

All Zeros

1 in 8

3 in 24

User Word

8 Bit

User Word

16 Bit

User Word

24 Bit

Unknown

H Select User Word 8 Bit, User Word 16 Bit, or User Word

24 Bit to receive test patterns different from the preset

choices. If you choose User Word, the test pattern description

changes to show the selected bit pattern. Edit the bits of the

word as needed.

H Select Unknown when you do not know what test pattern is

being transmitted or when the test pattern is not stable.

The demultiplexed DS1 signal will be delivered to the DS1 OUT

connector on the front panel.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters

Demapping a Tributary Signal (Add/Drop/Test Option Only)

To demap and test a tributary signal, you set Mapping to the

appropriate tributary mapping.

NOTE. The CTS 710 cannot demap a tributary signal and transmit a

tributary signal at the same time.

When you use tributary signal mapping, you must also specify the

virtual tributary under test and payload (see Figure 3–39).

Figure 3–39: Setting Tributary Mapping

To specify the VT Under Test and set the payload:

6. Specify the VT Under Test as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

SETTINGS

VT Under Test

as appropriate

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–110

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters

H Select VT #1 to specify the first virtual tributary.

H Select VT #28 to specify the last virtual tributary.

H Select Next to change the selection to the next higher virtual

tributary.

H Select Previous to change the selection to the next lower

virtual tributary.

7. Specify the payload as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Payload

as appropriate

H Select DS1 Unframed to demap an unframed DS1 signal or a

DS1 signal whose framing is unknown.

H Select DS1 SF (D4) to demap a DS1 signal (in D4 Super-

frame format) from the payload of the selected virtual

tributary.

H Select DS1 ESF to demap a DS1 signal (in Extended

Superframe format) from the payload of the selected virtual

tributary.

H Select DS3 Unframed to demap an unframed DS3 signal or a

DS3 signal whose framing is unknown.

H Select DS3 C-bit to demap a DS3 signal with C-bit framing.

H Select DS3 M13 to demap a DS3 signal with M-13 framing.

Dropping a Tributary Signal

To drop a signal it must be demapped, as described previously, and

you must turn on Tributary Drop.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters

To turn on Tributary Drop:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

SETTINGS

Tributary Drop

Off

On AMI

On B8ZS

H Select On to drop the signal specified on the Payload line.

The signal will be dropped to the appropriate OUT connector

on the front panel.

H Select On AMI to drop a DS1 signal using Alternate Mark

Inversion coding.

H Select On B8ZS to drop a DS1 signal using Binary Eight

Zero Substitution coding.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–112

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters

Setting the Test Pattern

To specify the test pattern that will be received:

1. Specify the received test pattern using the following procedure:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

SETTINGS

PRBS

2^23–1

Test Pattern

PRBS

2^20–1

PRBS

2^15–1

PRBS

2^09–1

All Ones

All Zeros

User Word

Unknown

H Select User Word to receive a test pattern different from the

preset choices. If you choose User Word, the test pattern

description changes to User Defined Byte.

H Select Unknown when you do not know what test pattern is

being transmitted or when the test pattern is not stable.

2. Select the line containing the byte to set the value of the User

Defined Byte.

3. Select a preset choice or select EDIT BYTE to enter a byte string

different from the preset choices.

When you are finished editing the byte, select DONE.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–113

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters

Unequipped Payload Mapping

If you choose Bulk Fill No Mapping (Unequipped) payload mapping,

the CTS 710 receiver expects to find the unequipped code in

byte C2. The received payload is ignored except for parity checks.

Checking Received Optical Power or Received Peak Voltage

To check the optical power or the peak voltage of the received

SONET signal:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

SIGNAL STATUS none

none

NOTE. The CTS 710 may take several seconds to respond when a

signal is connected to the input.

If Receive Rate, on the RECEIVE SETTINGS page, is set to an

optical rate, the SIGNAL STATUS page displays the received optical

power. If Receive Rate is set to an electrical rate, the SIGNAL

STATUS page displays the received peak voltage.

The optical power of the received signal is displayed in dBm (see

Figure 3–40). The peak voltage of the received signal is displayed in

volts. The SIGNAL STATUS page does not display results for

tributary signals.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–114

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters

Figure 3–40: Displaying Received Optical Power

Viewing Overhead Bytes

This section describes how to use the TRANSPORT OVERHEAD

and PATH OVERHEAD pages to view overhead bytes. The display

updates about once per second to track changes in the overhead. At

any time, you can pause the updating process to analyze the bytes.

Viewing Transport Overhead Bytes

To view transport overhead bytes:

1. Display the transport overhead as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

TRANSPORT

OVERHEAD

none

If you are receiving a line rate higher than the SONET basic-level

rates STS-1 or OC-1, you must indicate which overhead, at the

STS-1 level, you want to display.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters

2. Select the columns you wish to display as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Showing

as appropriate

Overhead for

Viewing Path Overhead Bytes

To view path overhead bytes:

1. Display the path overhead as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

TRANSPORT

OVERHEAD

Overhead View

VT1.5 Overhead

NOTE. The choices available depend on the mapping of the received

signal.

H Select VT1.5 Overhead to display the V5 overhead byte.

Displaying the J1 Path Trace Message

To view the Path Trace Message:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

PATH

OVERHEAD

(see Figure 3–41)

none

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–116

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters

Displaying the V5 Byte

To view the V5 byte:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

PATH

OVERHEAD

(see Figure 3–41)

Overhead View

VT1.5 Overhead

Figure 3–41: J1 Path Trace Message Received by the CTS 710

Dropping DCC and User Channel Overhead Bytes

You drop the contents of the Data Communications Channel (DCC)

and User Channel to an external protocol analyzer. The data from the

DCC and User Channel is dropped through the Overhead Add/Drop

Port located on the rear panel. See Appendix G for detailed

information on the port pin assignments.

To drop data from the DCC:

1. Connect an external protocol analyzer to the CTS 710 using the

Overhead Add/Drop Port on the rear panel of the CTS 710.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–117

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters

2. Configure the CTS 710 to drop the DCC data bytes:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

TRANSPORT

OVERHEAD

External Drop

(see Figure 3–42)

None

D1–D3

D4–D12

H Select None if you do not want to drop the DCC bytes.

H Select D1–D3 to drop the D1–D3 bytes of the DCC.

H Select D4–D12 to drop the D4–D12 bytes of the DCC.

H Select F1 to drop the F1 byte of the DCC.

Figure 3–42: Dropping Data from the DCC

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–118

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters

To drop data from the User Channel:

1. Connect an external protocol analyzer to the CTS 710 using the

Overhead Add/Drop Port on the rear panel of the CTS 710.

2. Configure the CTS 710 to drop the User Channel data byte:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

PATH

OVERHEAD

External Drop

(see Figure 3–43)

None

H Select None if you do not want to drop the User Channel data.

H Select F2 to drop the User Channel byte.

Figure 3–43: Dropping the User Channel Data Byte

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–119

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters

Controlling the Display Update

To pause or continue overhead byte updating:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

PATH

OVERHEAD

Pause Control

Pause

Continue

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–120

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Tributary Receive Parameters

This section describes how to manually set the receive rate, receive

level, framing, and test pattern for tributary signals.

Pressing AUTOSCAN sets the receive parameters automatically

based on the received signal.

Steps for Setting Parameters

The sequence of steps for setting receive parameters varies with

signal to be received. Figure 3–44 shows the sequence of steps

required to set the receive parameters for tributary signals (for

example, DS3). Figure 3–45 shows the sequence of steps required to

set the receive parameters for demultiplexing a DS1 signal from a

DS3 signal.

Set

Rate

Set

Framing

Set Test

Pattern

Set Level

Figure 3–44: Sequence for Setting Tributary Signal Parameters

Set

Rate

Set DS3

Framing

Set DS1

Under Test

Set Test

Pattern

Set DS1

Framing

Set Level

Figure 3–45: Sequence for Setting Signal Parameters to Demultiplex a DS1 from a

DS3

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–121

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters

Setting the Receive Rate

To set the receive rate:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

SETTINGS

Receive Rate

as appropriate

(see Figure 3–46)

H Select DS1, DS3, or DS3–>DS1 Demux to receive a tributary

rate signal.

Selecting DS3–>DS1 Demux will demultiplex a DS1 signal from

a received DS3 signal. All measurements are made at the DS1

level except for Loss of Signal.

Available DSn

Receive Rates

Figure 3–46: Tributary Signal Receive Rates

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–122

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters

Independent Receive and Transmit Settings

Generally, you can set the receive and transmit settings independent-

ly. For example, you can receive an electrical signal at the DS3 rate

while simultaneously transmitting an optical signal at the OC-3 rate.

However, when working with tributary signals, the transmit and

receive parameters are not completely independent. You cannot

transmit a DS1 signal and receive a DS3 signal. When working with

tributary signals, you must set the mapping for transmit and receive

to the same value or to No Mapping. For example, you can transmit

a VT1.5 signal and receive an OC-12 signal, but you must set the

mapping of the received signal to either No Mapping or VT1.5; it

cannot be set to DS3.

Coupling Receive and Transmit Settings

If your application requires that the receive settings and transmit

settings be identical, you can save time by coupling them together.

After they are coupled, any change you make to a parameter on the

RECEIVE SETTINGS page will also be made to the corresponding

setting in the TRANSMIT SETTINGS page of the RECEIVE menu.

The inverse is also true.

To couple the receive and transmit settings together from the

RECEIVE SETTINGS page:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

SETTINGS

Tx/Rx Settings

Coupled

NOTE. When settings are coupled from the RECEIVE SETTINGS

page, the transmit parameters are changed to match the receive

parameters. Conversely, when settings are coupled from the

TRANSMIT SETTINGS page, the receive parameters are changed to

match the transmit parameters.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–123

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters

To change receive and transmit settings so that they are no longer

coupled:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

SETTINGS

Tx/Rx Settings

Independent

Notice that the signal status icons, in the upper-right corner of the

display, changed to indicate that the settings are no longer coupled.

Setting the Receive Level

To specify the receive level for electrical signals:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

SETTINGS

Receive Level

Normal

Monitor

Bridge

H Select Normal to set the line level to normal.

H Select Monitor to set the line level to the monitor level.

H Select Bridge to set the line level to the bridged level.

Setting the Framing

When receiving a tributary signal you can specify the framing of the

signal.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–124

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters

To specify the framing of a received tributary signal:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

SETTINGS

Framing

as appropriate

NOTE. The choices available for Framing depend on the selected

Receive Rate.

H Select DS1 Unframed to receive an unframed DS1 signal.

H Select DS1 SF (D4) to receive a DS1 signal with SuperFrame

framing.

H Select DS1 ESF to receive a DS1 signal with Extended

SuperFrame framing.

H Select DS3 Unframed to receive an unframed DS3 signal.

H Select DS3 C-bit to receive a DS3 signal using C-bit framing.

H Select DS3 M13 to receive a DS3 signal using M13 framing.

Specifying the Test Pattern

To specify the test pattern of the received signal:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

SETTINGS

as appropriate

Test Pattern

NOTE. The choices available for Test Pattern depend on the selected

Receive Rate.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–125

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters

H Select 1 in 8 to set the test pattern to 1000 0000.

H Select User Word 8 bit, User Word 16 bit, or User Word

24 bit to set a test pattern different from the preset choices. If

you choose User Word, the test pattern description changes to

User Defined Byte.

H Select Unknown when you do not know what test pattern is

being transmitted or when the test pattern is not stable.

If you select User Word for the test pattern, set the value of the User

Word as follows:

1. Select the line containing the byte to set the value of the User

Defined Byte.

2. Define the contents of the User Defined Byte as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

select displayed

byte

Set to 00000000

Set to 11111111

Default 10101010

EDIT BYTE

H Select Set to 00000000 to set the test pattern to all zeros.

H Select Set to 11111111 to set the test pattern to all ones.

H Select Default 10101010 to set the test pattern to alternating

ones and zeros

3. Select EDIT BYTE to specify a value different from the preset

choices.

4. Select DONE when you are finished editing the byte.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–126

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters

Demultiplexing a DS1 from a DS3 Signal

To demultiplex a DS1 signal from a DS3 signal:

1. After setting the Receive Rate to DS3–>DS1 Demux, specify the

DS3 framing as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RECEIVE

SETTINGS

DS3 Framing

DS3 C–bit

DS3 M13

2. Specify the DS1 User Test as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

DS1 Under Test

DS1 #1

DS1 #28

H Select DS1 #1 to specify the first DS1 signal.

H Select DS1 #28 to specify the last DS1 signal.

H Select Next to change the selection to the next higher DS1

signal.

H Select Previous to change the selection to the next lower DS1

signal.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–127

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters

3. Specify the DS1 Framing as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Framing

DS1 Unframed

DS1 SF (D4)

DS1 ESF

H Select DS1 Unframed to demultiplex an unframed DS1

signal or a DS1 signal whose framing is unknown.

H Select DS1 SF (D4) to demultiplex a DS1 signal in D4

Superframe format.

H Select DS1 ESF to demultiplex a DS1 signal in Extended

Superframe format.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–128

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters

4. Specify the received test pattern as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

PRBS

Test Pattern

2^23–1

PRBS

2^20–1

PRBS

2^15–1

QRSS

2^20–1

All Ones

All Zeros

1 in 8

3 in 24

User Word

8 Bit

User Word

16 Bit

User Word

24 Bit

Unknown

H Select User Word 8 Bit, User Word 16 Bit, or User Word

24 Bit to receive test patterns different from the preset

choices. If you choose User Word, the test pattern description

changes to show the selected bit pattern. Edit the bits of the

word as needed.

H Select Unknown when you do not know what test pattern is

being transmitted or when the test pattern is not stable.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–129

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–130

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors

This section describes how to simulate error conditions, set alarms,

and simulate network failures. To test the response of a network, you

might need to simulate parity errors, send alarm signals, and simulate

network failures. This type of testing is simple and convenient using

the CTS 710 SONET Test Set.

Simulating Error Conditions

The specific errors the CTS 710 simulates depend on the transmit

rate and payload mapping.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–131

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors

Specifying the Error to Insert

Specify the type of error transmitted as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

ERRORS &

ALARMS

Error type set to

Section B1 BIP

Line B2 BIP

Path B3 BIP

Path FEBE

Frame Bit

VT BIP

(Add/Drop/Test

Option Only)

VT FEBE

(Add/Drop/Test

Option Only)

Pattern Bit

(Add/Drop/Test

Option Only)

CRC (ESF)

(Add/Drop/Test

Option Only)

P–Bit

(Add/Drop/Test

Option Only)

C–Bit

(Add/Drop/Test

Option Only)

NOTE. The errors available to insert depend on the Mapping and

Payload settings. Not all errors are available all the time.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–132

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors

Inserting Errors

You can choose to insert errors manually (one at a time) or you can

have errors inserted automatically at a rate you specify.

To insert a single error, press the INSERT ERROR button.

To have the CTS 710 insert errors automatically:

1. Turn on automatic error insertion as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

ERRORS &

ALARMS

Error rate set to

None

1e–3

1e–4

1e–5

1e–6

1e–7

1e–8

USER DEFINED

H Select None to turn off automatic error insertion. However,

you can still insert errors manually using the front-panel

INSERT ERROR button.

H The maximum allowable error rate depends on the transmit

rate, signal structure, and error type (see Tables 3–11 and

3–12).

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–133

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors

Table 3–11: Maximum Error Rates for SONET Signals

Error Type

Rate:

Structure

Section B1 Line B2

Path B3

BIP

Path FEBE Pattern Bit

STS-1/OC-1: 1E–3

1 X STS-1

1E–3

1E–4

1E–3

1E–4

1E–3

1E–4

1E–3

1E–4

1E–3

STS-3/OC-3: 1E–4

3 X STS-1

1E–4

STS-3/OC-3: 1E–4

1 X STS-3c

OC-12:

1E–5

12 X STS-1

OC-12:

1E–5

4 X STS-3c

Table 3–12: Maximum Error Rates for Tributary Signals

DS1

DS3

Maximum

Rate

Minimum

Rate

Maximum

Rate

Minimum

Rate

Error Type

VT BIP

VT FEBE

Parity

1E–3

1E–4

N/A

1E–10

N/A

1E–4

N/A

1E–9

N/A

CRC

1E–4

1E–2

1E–8

1E–5

1E–8

Frame

1E–2

1E–7

1E–9

Data

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–134

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors

NOTE. The CTS 710 can measure all the error rates it can transmit

except for DS3 Parity where the maximum measured error rate is

5e-5.

2. Select USER DEFINED to specify an error rate different from

the preset choices. The CTS 710 enters edit mode (Figure 3–47).

H If the knob is assigned to Coarse, it changes the exponent.

H If the knob is assigned to Fine, it changes the decimal

number.

3. Select DONE to enter the error rate you have specified.

Figure 3–47: Setting An Error Rate

Setting Alarms

The CTS 710 can simulate alarm conditions to test the response of

the network.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–135

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors

To transmit an alarm:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

ERRORS &

ALARMS

Transmit alarm

set to

None

Line AIS

Line FERF

Path AIS

Path FERF

VT AIS

(Add/Drop/Test

Option Only)

VT FERF

(Add/Drop/Test

Option Only)

DSn Yellow

(Add/Drop/Test

Option Only)

DSn AIS

(Add/Drop/Test

Option Only)

DS3 Idle

(Add/Drop/Test

Option Only)

H Select None to stop transmitting an alarm.

H Select Line AIS to transmit a Line AIS alarm.

H Select Line FERF to transmit a Line FERF alarm.

H Select Path AIS to transmit a Path AIS alarm.

H Select Path FERF to transmit a Path FERF alarm.

H Select VT AIS to transmit a VT AIS alarm.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–136

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors

H Select VT FERF to transmit a VT FERF alarm.

H Select DSn Yellow to transmit a DSn Yellow alarm.

H Select DSn AIS to transmit a DSn AIS alarm.

H Select DS3 Idle to transmit a DS3 Idle alarm.

NOTE. The VT AIS and VT FERF choices will be displayed only if

Mapping, on the TRANSMIT SETTINGS page, is set to VT 1.5 Async.

All transmit alarm choices remain in effect until they are deliberately

turned off.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–137

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors

Simulating Transmit Failures

The CTS 710 can simulate transmit failure conditions to test the

response of the network.

To simulate a transmit failure:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

ERRORS &

ALARMS

Failure set to

None

LOS

LOF

STS LOP

(Add/Drop/Test

Option Only)

VT LOP

(Add/Drop/Test

Option Only)

VT LOM

(Add/Drop/Test

Option Only)

NOTE. VT LOP and VT LOM can be selected only if Mapping, on the

TRANSMIT SETTINGS page, is set to VT 1.5 Async.

H Select None to stop simulating failures.

H Select LOS to simulate a loss of signal failure.

H Select LOF to simulate a loss of frame failure.

H Select STS LOP to simulate a loss of pointer failure in the STS.

H Select VT LOP to simulate a loss of pointer failure in the virtual

tributary.

H Select VT LOM to simulate a loss of multiframe failure in the

virtual tributary.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–138

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors

All transmit failures remain in effect until they are deliberately

turned off.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–139

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–140

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Pointers and Changing Timing

This section describes how to generate pointer movements within the

transmitted signal. When stress testing a network, you may want to

move pointers or introduce a frequency offset. The CTS 710 SONET

Test Set allows you to control this type of testing five ways. You can:

H Make discrete pointer movements under manual control

H Make repetitive pointer movements at a rate you determine

H Introduce a frequency offset in the internally generated SPE

H Introduce a frequency offset in the transmit rate

H Generate sequences of pointer movements

Setting Pointers

To set up the CTS 710 to make discrete or repetitive pointer

movements:

1. Specify the pointer mode as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

POINTERS &

TIMING

Pointer / Timing

Mode

Pointer

Movement

The choices allow you to choose to move pointers using time

parameters or with a frequency offset. Selecting Pointer

Movements moves pointers utilizing time parameters.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–141

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Pointers and Changing Timing

2. Specify the pointer type as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

POINTERS &

TIMING

Pointer Type

STS Pointer

VT Pointer

Manual Pointer Control

You can move pointers under manual control using the POINTER

ACTION button on the front panel. To set up for this type of control,

use the knob to highlight the Pointer Control line.

There are three types of manual pointer movements: Single, Burst,

and Continuous (see Figure 3–48). The choices are described in

detail below; some require additional setup.

Figure 3–48: Manual Pointer Control Choices

Single Pointer Movements. With Single selected, each press of the

front-panel POINTER ACTION button moves the pointer up or down

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–142

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Pointers and Changing Timing

by one location. The first press increments the pointer, the second

press decrements it, the third press increments it, and so forth.

Burst Pointer Movements. With Burst selected, pressing the

front-panel POINTER ACTION button starts a burst of pointer

movement. Each burst consists of a series of one-location pointer

movements that are spaced four frames apart. Pressing POINTER

ACTION repeatedly alternates between an incrementing burst and a

decrementing burst (see Figure 3–49).

To set the number of pointer movements in the burst:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Pointer Control

Burst Size

Burst

To start a burst of pointer movements, press POINTER ACTION.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–143

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Pointers and Changing Timing

First Press of

POINTER

ACTION

Example

Burst of Four

Pointer

Next Two Presses of POINTER

ACTION

Movements

Increment

500 ms,

Nominal

Decrement

Figure 3–49: Alternating Burst Pointer Movement

Setting Pointer to a Specific Value. With Set to Value selected, you can

move the pointer immediately to a new location, with or without a

new data flag being set. Payload data can be lost when you use jump

pointer movements of this type.

To set the new pointer value for an STS pointer:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Pointer Control

Set Value

Pointer Value Set Min 0

Max 782

Default 522

Illegal (Max + 1)

USER DEFINED

H Select Min 0 to set the pointer to location zero (points to the byte

immediately following the H3 transport overhead byte). If you

choose this setting, the pointer is moved immediately; you do not

need to press POINTER ACTION.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–144

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Pointers and Changing Timing

H Select Max 782 to set the pointer to location 782 (points to the

byte immediately preceding the H1 transport overhead byte of the

next frame). If you choose this setting, the pointer is moved

immediately; you do not need to press POINTER ACTION.

H Select Default 522 to set the pointer to location 522 (points to the

first payload byte in the next frame). If you choose this setting,

the pointer is moved immediately; you do not need to press

POINTER ACTION.

H Select Illegal (Max+1) to move the pointer to illegal location 783

(the maximum allowed location + 1). Choosing the illegal pointer

location may cause a loss-of-pointer failure. If you choose this

setting, the pointer is moved immediately; you do not need to

press POINTER ACTION.

H Select USER DEFINED to set the pointer to a value different

from the preset choices.

Selecting USER DEFINED places the CTS 710 into Edit Mode.

H Select DONE when you are finished setting the pointer value.

As soon as you press DONE, the pointer is moved; you do not

need to press POINTER ACTION.

To set the new pointer value for a VT pointer:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Pointer Control

Set Value

Pointer Value Set Min 0

Max 103

Default 78

Illegal (Max + 1)

USER DEFINED

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–145

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Pointers and Changing Timing

H Select Min 0 to set the pointer to location zero. If you choose this

setting, the pointer is moved immediately; you do not need to

press POINTER ACTION.

H Select Max 103 to set the pointer to location 103. If you choose

this setting, the pointer is moved immediately; you do not need to

press POINTER ACTION.

H Select Default 78 to set the pointer to location 78. If you choose

this setting, the pointer is moved immediately; you do not need to

press POINTER ACTION.

H Select Illegal (Max+1) to move the pointer to illegal location 104

(the maximum allowed location + 1). Choosing the illegal pointer

location may cause a loss-of-pointer failure. If you choose this

setting, the pointer is moved immediately; you do not need to

press POINTER ACTION.

3. Specify whether a New Data Flag is set with the pointer

movement as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Set with New

Data Flag

Yes

4. Set the Pointer S-Bits as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Pointer S–Bits

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–146

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Pointers and Changing Timing

Continuous Pointer Movement

To make repetitive pointer movements:

1. Specify the type of pointer control and movement rate as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Pointer Control

Pointer Rate

Continuous

Max 48 ms

(Mapping = VT1.5

Async only)

Max 2ms

Min 10000ms

Default 50ms

USER DEFINED

H Select Max 48ms to move the pointer one location every 48

milliseconds.

H Select Max 2ms to move the pointer one location every

sixteen frames.

H Select Min 10000ms to move the pointer location one

location every 10 seconds.

H Select Default 50ms to move the pointer one location every

50 ms.

H Select USER DEFINED to set continuous pointer movement

at a rate different from the preset choices.

2. Select USER DEFINED to set the pointer movement to a value

different from the preset choices.

Selecting USER DEFINED places the CTS 710 into Edit Mode.

Now you can set the rate to the exact value you want, with 1 ms

resolution. The minimum rate is 1 ms. The maximum rate is

10000 ms.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–147

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Pointers and Changing Timing

3. Specify the pointer movement direction as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Pointer Direction Increment

Decrement

Alternate

H Selecting Increment causes the pointer to increment at the set

rate.

H Selecting Decrement causes the pointer to decrement at the

set rate.

H Selecting Alternate causes pointer movements at the set rate,

but they alternate in incrementing and decrementing

directions.

When using continuous pointer movement, a message line in the

display tells you the equivalent payload frequency offset in parts

per million if the pointer direction is set to either increment or

decrement (see Figure 3–50).

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–148

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Pointers and Changing Timing

Figure 3–50: Incrementing Pointer Location Once Every Two Millisec-

onds

Changing Timing

As an alternative to setting pointer movements directly, you can

introduce a frequency offset in the internally-generated SPE, the

transmit line rate, or both together.

To generate pointer movements using frequency offset:

1. Specify the pointer/timing mode as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

POINTERS &

TIMING

Pointer / Timing

Mode

Frequency Offset

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–149

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Pointers and Changing Timing

2. Specify the Offset Mode as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Offset Mode

Line

Payload

H Select Line to change the transmit line rate. With this setting,

the SPE location (pointer) does not move relative to the

transmitted frame.

H Select Payload to change the offset of the payload.

3. Specify the frequency offset as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Frequency Offset Max +100ppm

Stress +4.6ppm

Stress –4.6ppm

Default 0ppm

USER DEFINED

H Select Max +100ppm to set the frequency offset to the

maximum available amount.

H Select Stress +4.6ppm to set the frequency offset at the upper

stratum three limit.

H Select Stress –4.6ppm to set the frequency offset at the lower

stratum three limit.

H Select Default 0ppm to turn off frequency offset.

H Select USER DEFINED to set a frequency offset different

from the preset choices.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–150

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Pointers and Changing Timing

Selecting USER DEFINED places the CTS 710 in Edit Mode.

The knob is assigned to change the value of the frequency offset.

H Coarse changes the frequency offset by 10.0 ppm.

H Fine changes the frequency offset by 0.1 ppm.

The frequency offset can be changed by ±100.0 ppm.

H Select DONE to enter the frequency offset when you are

finished setting it.

When using a frequency offset, a message line in the display tells

you the equivalent pointer movement rate. Figure 3–51 shows an

example frequency offset and the resulting message.

Figure 3–51: Offsetting the Transmit Rate by +4.6 ppm

Generating Pointer Sequences

In addition to the simpler pointer movements previously described,

the CTS 710 can generate pointer sequences (sequences of pointer

movements). Pointer sequences are made up of three periods: the

Initialization Period, the Cool Down Period, and the Sequence Period

(see Figure 3–52).

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–151

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Pointers and Changing Timing

Added or Cancelled Pointer Positions

. . .

Repeating Pattern

Time

ꢀ 30 s

Initialization Cool Down

Sequence Period

Figure 3–52: The Three Periods of a Pointer Sequence

H Initialization Period – a thirty second period where the CTS 710

produces a 30 second burst of 1 pointer movement per second in

the same direction as the specified pointer sequence. The

Initialization Period can be turned on or off.

H Cool Down Period – a period at least 60 seconds long, following

the Initialization Period, where the specified pointer sequence is

running.

H Sequence Period – the period following the Cool Down period

where the specified pointer sequence runs continuously.

The CTS 710 generates the pointer sequences described in the

ANSI T1.105.03–1994 standard. The CTS 710 also supports the

sequences described in the ITU-T G.783 standard. An example of a

pointer sequence is shown in Figure 3–53. The details of these

sequences are shown in Table 3–13. Note that not all pointer

sequences are available all the time. Some sequences are available

only with one pointer type or with a specific mapping, as shown in

Table 3–14.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–152

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Pointers and Changing Timing

87–3 Pattern

No Pointer

Adjustment

Start of Next

87–3 Pattern

Pointer Adjustment

. . .

Figure 3–53: An Example of a Pointer Sequence

Table 3–13: Pointer Sequences Generated

Pointer

Sequence

Description

Single

Time between pointer adjustments is 30 s.

Burst

Time between bursts of 3 pointers for STS pointers is 0.5 ms and for VT

pointers is 2 ms.

Time between pointer bursts is 30 s.

Phase Transient Time between pointer movement burst of seven pointers is 0.25 s,

0.25 s, 0.5 s, 0.5 s, 0.5 s, 0.5 s.

Time between pointer bursts is 30 s.

Periodic

Continuous

Time between STS pointers has a range of 0.034 s to 10 s with a

resolution of 1 ms.

Periodic

Time between STS pointers has a range of 0.034 s to 10 s with a

Continuous with resolution of 1 ms.

Cancel

Time between cancelled pointers is equal to: (time between pointer

movements ^ꢀN), where N is selected to be the smallest integer that

makes the product ^ꢁ30 s.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–153

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Pointers and Changing Timing

Table 3–13: Pointer Sequences Generated (Cont.)

Pointer

Sequence

Description

Periodic

Time between added pointer movement and previous normal pointer

Continuous with movement for STS pointers is 0.5 ms and for VT1.5 pointers is 2 ms.

Add

Time between normal pointer movements is as follows:

D STS pointers have a range of 0.34 s to 10 s with a

resolution of 1 ms.

D VT1.5 pointer movements has a range of 1 s to 10 s with a resolution

of 1 ms.

Periodic 87–3

Sequence pattern is 87 pointer movements followed by 3 missing pointer

movements.

Time between STS pointer movements has a range of 0.34 s to 10 s with

a resolution of 1 ms.

Periodic 87–3

With Cancel

Sequence pattern is 87 pointer movements followed by 3 missing pointer

movements with a cancelled pointer movement at the 87th pointer.

Time between STS pointer movements has a range of 0.34 s to 10 s with

a resolution of 1 ms.

Time between cancelled pointers is equal to: (time between pointers ^ꢀ

90 ꢀ N) where N is selected to be the smallest integer that makes this

product ^ꢁ30 s.

Periodic 87–3

With Add

Sequence pattern is 87 pointer movements followed by 3 missing pointer

movements with an added pointer movement after the 43rd pointer.

Time between STS pointer movements has a range of 0.34 s to 10 s with

a resolution of 1 ms; time between added pointer movement and

previous normal pointer movement for STS pointers is 0.5 ms.

Time between added pointers is equal to: (time between pointers ^ꢀ90

ꢀ N) where N is selected to be the smallest integer that makes this

product ^ꢁ30 s.

Periodic 26–1

Sequence pattern is 26 pointer movements followed by 1 missing pointer

movement.

Time between VT1.5 pointer movements has a range of 1 s to 10 s with

a resolution of 1 ms.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–154

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Pointers and Changing Timing

Table 3–13: Pointer Sequences Generated (Cont.)

Pointer

Sequence

Description

Periodic 26–1

With Cancel

Sequence pattern is 26 pointer movements followed by 1 missing pointer

movement with a cancelled pointer movement at the 26th pointer,

yielding a gap of 2.

Time between VT1.5 pointer movements has a range of 1 s to 10 s with

a resolution of 1 ms.

Time between cancelled pointers is equal to: (time between pointers ^ꢀ

27 ꢀ N) where N is selected to be the smallest integer that makes this

product ^ꢁ30 s.

Periodic 26–1

With Add

Sequence pattern is 26 pointer movements followed by 1 missing pointer

movement with an added pointer movement after the 13th pointer.

Time between normal pointer movements has a range of 1 s to 10 s with

a resolution of 1 ms; time between added pointer movement and

previous normal pointer movement is 2 ms.

Time between added pointers is equal to: (time between pointers ^ꢀ27

ꢀ N) where N is selected to be the smallest integer that makes this

product ^ꢁ30 s.

Single

Alternating

Alternating single pointer movement. The time between pointer

movements is 30 s.

Double

Alternating

Alternating double pointer movement. The time between the double

pointer movements is 2 ms, and the time between each pair of pointer

movements is 30 s.

Table 3–14: Availability of Pointer Sequences

Mapping

Pointer Sequence

Single

STS

✔

VT1.5

✔

Burst

✔

Phase Transient

✔

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–155

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Pointers and Changing Timing

Table 3–14: Availability of Pointer Sequences (Cont.)

Mapping

Pointer Sequence

STS

✔

VT1.5

✔

Periodic Continuous

Periodic Continuous with Cancel

Periodic Continuous with Add

Periodic 87–3

✔

Periodic 87–3 With Cancel

Periodic 87–3 With Add

Periodic 26–1

✔

Periodic 26–1 With Cancel

Periodic 26–1 With Add

Single Alternating

✔

Double Alternating

Starting Pointer Sequences

To set up the CTS 710 to make generate pointer sequences:

1. Specify the pointer mode as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

POINTERS &

TIMING

Pointer / Timing

Mode

Pointer

Sequences

The choices allow you to move pointers using time parameters,

with a frequency offset, or in sequences. Selecting Pointer

Sequences moves pointers in sequential patterns.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–156

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Pointers and Changing Timing

2. Specify the pointer type as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Pointer Type

STS Pointer

VT Pointer

3. Specify the Sequence Type as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Sequence Type

as appropriate

NOTE. The pointer sequences available depend on the selected

Pointer Type.

4. If Sequence Type is set to anything other than Single or Double

Alternating, set the pointer direction as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Pointer Direction Increment

Decrement

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–157

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Pointers and Changing Timing

5. If Sequence Type is set to one of the continuous patterns, set the

pointer rate as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Pointer Rate

1000ms

2000ms

5000ms

10000ms

USER DEFINED

H Select USER DEFINED to set a pointer rate different from

the preset choices.

6. Specify whether Initialization Time is included as part of the

pointer sequence as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Initialization Time On

Off

NOTE. The Initialization Time is a set value (either 0 seconds or

30 seconds); it cannot be changed directly.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–158

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Pointers and Changing Timing

7. Specify whether Cool Down Time is included as part of the

pointer sequence as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Cool Down Time On

Off

NOTE. The Cool Down Time is a calculated value based on the

sequence type; it cannot be changed directly.

8. To initiate a pointer sequence, press POINTER ACTION.

Pointer sequences will continue to run until they are stopped.

9. To stop a pointer sequence, press POINTER ACTION.

After you press POINTER ACTION, the pointer sequence begins.

The status area at the bottom of the display will change to

indicate where the CTS 710 is within the pointer sequence; see

Figure 3–54. Table 3–15 describes the meaning of the lines in the

status display.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–159

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Pointers and Changing Timing

Figure 3–54: Status Display While Pointer Sequences are Running

Table 3–15: Status Lines for Pointer Sequences

Status Line

Description

Current State

Indicates the state of Pointer Se-

quences: Not Running, Initialization

State, Cool Down, or Sequences

Running

Time Between Anomalies

Indicates the time between pointer

anomalies

Time Until Next Anomaly

Indicates the time remaining until the

next anomaly occurs

Time Between Ptr Adj

Indicates the time between pointer

adjustments

Time Until Next Ptr Adj

Indicates the time remaining until the

next pointer adjustment occurs

This information is displayed depending on sequence type. Not all information is

displayed. When this information is displayed, Time Between Anomalies is

displayed with Time Until Next Anomaly, and Time Between Prt Adj is displayed

with Time Until Next Ptr Adj.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–160

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Testing Automatic Protection Switching

This section describes how to generate Automatic Protection

Switching (APS) commands and view the network response.

APS commands are located in the K1 and K2 bytes of the transport

overhead. The K1 byte indicates a request for switch action. The K2

byte provides additional information about network architecture and

alarm conditions.

Setting the APS Mode

The APS mode specifies whether the network is a ring network or a

span network. The APS mode determines how the K1 and K2 bytes

are interpreted and displayed by the CTS 710.

To specify the APS mode:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

APS

COMMANDS

(see Figure 3–55)

APS Mode

Span

Ring

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–161

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Testing Automatic Protection Switching

Figure 3–55: The APS COMMANDS Page

Setting the K1 Byte

There are two ways to edit the bits of the K1 byte. The first way is to

set the value of each bit of the byte, one bit at a time. The second

way is to assign values to the bits using preset choices, which use

mnemonics to identify bit patterns.

To set the bit pattern of the K1 byte one bit at a time:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

APS

COMMANDS

K1 FULL BYTE

Set to

00000000

Set to

11111111

Default

10101010

EDIT BYTE

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–162

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Testing Automatic Protection Switching

H Select EDIT BYTE to set the byte to a pattern different than the

preset choices.

To set the bit pattern for the first four bits of the K1 byte:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

APS

COMMANDS

Bits 1–4: Switch

Request

as appropriate

(under K1 FULL

BYTE)

The selections available for the first four bits of the K1 byte depend

on whether the mode is set to Ring or Span. See Tables 3–16 and

3–17 for descriptions of the preset choices.

Table 3–16: Choices for Bits 1–4 of the K1 Byte When Mode is Set to

Ring

Main Screen

Mnemonic

Choice Text

Bit Pattern

NR No Request

0000

RR–R

RR–S

EXER–R

EXER–S

WTR

RR–R Reverse Request Ring

RR–S Reverse Request Span

EXER–R Exerciser Ring

0001

0010

0011

0100

0101

0110

0111

1000

1001

1010

1011

EXER–S Exerciser Span

WTR Wait To Restore

MS–R

MS–S

SD–R

SD–S

SD–P

SF–R

MS–S Manual Switch Ring

MS–S Manual Switch Span

SD–R Signal Degrade Ring

SD–S Signal Degrade Span

SD–P Signal Degrade Protection

SF–R Signal Fail Ring

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–163

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Testing Automatic Protection Switching

Table 3–16: Choices for Bits 1–4 of the K1 Byte When Mode is Set to

Ring (Cont.)

Main Screen

Mnemonic

Choice Text

Bit Pattern

SF–S

FS–R

FS–S

LP–S

SF–S Signal Fail Span

1100

FS–R Forced Switch Ring

1101

1110

1111

FS–S Forced Switch Span

LP–S Lockout of Protection Span

Table 3–17: Choices for Bits 1–4 of the K1 Byte When Mode is Set to

Span

Main Screen

Mnemonic

Choice Text

Bit Pattern

NR No Request

0000

DNR

DNR Do Not Revert

RR Reverse Request

Not Used

0001

0010

0011

0100

0101

0110

0111

1000

1001

1010

1011

1100

Not Used

EXER

EXER Exerciser

Not Used

WTR

WTR Wait to Restore

Not Used

MS Manual Switch

Not Used

SD–LP

SD–HP

SF–LP

SD Signal Degrade Low

SD Signal Degrade High

SF Signal Fail Low

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–164

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Testing Automatic Protection Switching

Table 3–17: Choices for Bits 1–4 of the K1 Byte When Mode is Set to

Span (Cont.)

Main Screen

Mnemonic

SF–HP

Choice Text

Bit Pattern

SF Signal Fail High

1101

FS Forced Switch

1110

1111

LP Lockout of Protection

The label for Bits 5–8, of the K1 byte, is Destination Node ID when

the mode is set to Span. The label for Bits 5–8 is Channel Requesting

when the mode is set to Ring.

To set the bit pattern for the last four bits of the K1 byte:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

APS

COMMANDS

Bits 5–8:

(under K1 FULL

BYTE)

as appropriate

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–165

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Testing Automatic Protection Switching

See Table 3–18 for descriptions of the preset choices.

Table 3–18: Choices for Bits 5–8 of the K1 Byte

Main Screen

Mnemonic

Choice Text

Bit Pattern

#0 (0000)

0000

#1 (0001)

#2 (0010)

#3 (0011)

#4 (0100)

#5 (0101)

#6 (0110)

#7 (0111)

#8 (1000)

#9 (1001)

#10 (1010)

#11 (1011)

#12 (1100)

#13 (1101)

#14 (1110)

#15 (1111)

0001

0010

0011

0100

0101

0110

0111

1000

1001

1010

1011

1100

1101

1110

1111

#10

#11

#12

#13

#14

#15

Setting the K2 Byte

There are two ways to edit the bits of the K2 byte. The first way is to

set the value of each bit of the byte, one bit at a time. The second

way is to assign values to the bits using preset choices, which use

mnemonics to identify bit patterns.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–166

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Testing Automatic Protection Switching

To set the bit pattern of the K2 byte one bit at a time:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

APS

COMMANDS

K2 FULL BYTE

Set to

00000000

Set to

11111111

Default

10101010

EDIT BYTE

H Select EDIT BYTE to set the byte to a pattern different than the

preset choices.

The label for Bits 1–4, of the K2 byte, is Channel Requesting when

the mode is set to Span. The label for Bits 5–8 is Source Node ID

when the mode is set to Ring.

To set the bit pattern for the first four bits of the K2 byte:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

APS

COMMANDS

Bits 1–4:

(under K2 FULL

BYTE)

as appropriate

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–167

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Testing Automatic Protection Switching

See Table 3–19 for descriptions of the preset choices.

Table 3–19: Choices for Bits 1–4 of the K2 Byte

Main Screen

Mnemonic

Choice Text

Bit Pattern

#0 (0000)

0000

#1 (0001)

#2 (0010)

#3 (0011)

#4 (0100)

#5 (0101)

#6 (0110)

#7 (0111)

#8 (1000)

#9 (1001)

#10 (1010)

#11 (1011)

#12 (1100)

#13 (1101)

#14 (1110)

#15 (1111)

0001

0010

0011

0100

0101

0110

0111

1000

1001

1010

1011

1100

1101

1110

1111

#10

#11

#12

#13

#14

#15

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–168

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Testing Automatic Protection Switching

The label for Bit 5, of the K2 byte, is Architecture when the mode is

set to Span. The label for Bit 5 is Path when the mode is set to Ring.

To set the value of the fifth bit of the K2 byte:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

APS

COMMANDS

Bit 5:

(under K2 FULL

BYTE)

as appropriate

See Tables 3–20 and 3–21 for descriptions of the preset choices for

Bit 5.

Table 3–20: Choices for Bit 5 of the K2 Byte When Mode is Set to

Span

Main Screen

Mnemonic

Choice Text

Bit Value

1+1

1:N

Table 3–21: Choices for Bit 5 of the K2 Byte When Mode is Set to

Ring

Main Screen

Mnemonic

Choice Text

Bit Value

SHORT

LONG

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–169

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Testing Automatic Protection Switching

The label for Bits 6–8, of the K2 byte, is Status whether the mode is

set to Ring or Span.

To set the bit pattern for the last three bits of the K2 byte:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

APS

COMMANDS

Bits 6–8:

(under K2 FULL

BYTE)

as appropriate

See Table 3–22 for descriptions of the preset choices.

Table 3–22: Choices for Bits 6–8 of the K2 Byte

Main Screen

Mnemonic

Choice Text

Bit Pattern

IDLE

000

BR Bridged

001

010

011

100

101

110

111

BR&SW

Not Used

FERF

BR & SW Bridged & Switched

Not Used

FERF

AIS

Transmitting the K1 and K2 Bytes

Changing the values of the K1 and K2 bytes, shown in the USER

SETUP column, does not automatically change the values of the

transmitted K1 and K2 bytes. The TRANSMIT column shows the K1

and K2 bytes that are being transmitted.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–170

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Testing Automatic Protection Switching

NOTE. You can edit the transmitted K1 and K2 bytes directly from the

TRANSPORT OVERHEAD page.

To transmit new K1 and K2 bytes:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

APS

COMMANDS

Transmit Setup

Transmit User

Setup

Transmit Default

Transmit Illegal

NOTE. You cannot transmit new values for the K1 or K2 bytes when

the CTS 710 is transmitting a Line AIS or Line FERF.

H Select Transmit User Setup to change the value of the K1 and

K2 bytes to that shown under USER SETUP.

H Select Transmit Default to change all the bits in the K1 and K2

bytes to zeros.

H Select Transmit Illegal to change all the bits in the K1 and K2

bytes to ones.

When you select an action from the Transmit Setup line, the

TRANSMIT column is updated.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–171

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Testing Automatic Protection Switching

Viewing the Network Response to APS Commands

To view the network response to APS commands:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

APS

COMMANDS

none

The network response to APS commands appears under the column

labeled RECEIVE on the APS COMMANDS page (see Fig-

ure 3–56).

The RECEIVE

Column

Figure 3–56: The RECEIVE Column on the APS COMMANDS Page

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–172

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Results

This section describes how to view, save, recall, and print test results.

You can look at test results while a test is running or after it has

completed. The CTS 710 SONET Test Set can display test results as

a summary or in a more detailed tabular form. The CTS 710 also

displays measurement history in a graphical format.

Viewing a Summary of Results

To display a summary of test results:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RESULTS

TEST SUMMARY none

none

Figure 3–57 shows the TEST SUMMARY page. The top half of the

display shows the source of the displayed results, the line rate of the

displayed results, the mapping of the displayed results, when the

displayed test results started and the duration of the test (elapsed

time). The bottom half of the display is where the TroubleScan

feature displays information. TroubleScan provides a quick overview

of test results by displaying the four most significant alarm, failure,

or error conditions that have occurred during the test. The specific

conditions that TroubleScan displays depends on the problems that

occur in the signal during the test.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–173

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Results

Figure 3–57: The Test Summary Page

Viewing Detailed Results

You can view results either as a summary or as a history. The

summary format displays test results in a table. The history format

displays test results in a graphical format.

The summary format is displayed on two pages in the RESULTS

menu, the MAIN RESULTS page, and the ERROR ANALYSIS

page. The MAIN RESULTS page provides an overview of test

results, divided into four categories: Errors, Failures, Alarms, and

Pointers. The ERROR ANALYSIS page displays an analysis of

errors according to T1M1. Errors on the ERROR ANALYSIS page

are displayed by Section, Line, Path, VT 1.5, DSn Path, or Pattern.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–174

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Results

Displaying an Overview of Test Results

To display an overview of test results:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RESULTS

MAIN RESULTS none

Errors

Failures

Alarms

Pointers

Table 3–23 lists all of the test results that are displayed on the MAIN

RESULTS page.

Table 3–23: Results Displayed on MAIN RESULTS Page

Category

Error Displayed

Errors

Parity

Section B1 BIP

Line B2 BIP

Path B3 BIP

VT BIP

Pattern Bit

DS1 CRC

P-Bit Parity

Line FEBE

Path FEBE

VT FEBE

Frame Bit

Failures

Loss of Signal Seconds

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–175

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Results

Table 3–23: Results Displayed on MAIN RESULTS Page (Cont.)

Category

Error Displayed

Loss of Frame Seconds

Out of Frame Seconds (SEFS)

Loss of STS Pointer Seconds

Loss of Power Seconds

Loss of VT Pointer Seconds

VT LOM Seconds

Loss of Pattern Sync Seconds

DSn Loss of Frame Seconds

Line AIS Seconds

Alarms

Line FERF Seconds

Path AIS Seconds

Path FERF Seconds

VT AIS Seconds

VT FERF Seconds

DSn AIS Seconds

DSn Yellow Seconds

DS3 Idle Seconds

Pointers

Loss of Pointer Seconds

New Data Flag Seconds

Illegal Pointer Seconds

Positive Justifications

Negative Justifications

Illegal Pointer Count

Pointer Value

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–176

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Results

The Errors category of the MAIN RESULTS page displays results in

three ways. The first way displays the count for each type of error.

The second way displays the error ratio for each error. The third way

displays the number of errored seconds that occurred for each type of

error during the test.

The Failures category of the MAIN RESULTS page displays the

number of seconds that the failure occurred.

The Alarms category of the MAIN RESULTS page displays the

number of seconds that the alarm occurred.

The Pointers category of the MAIN RESULTS page displays the

number of seconds certain conditions existed and the number of

times certain actions occurred.

Displaying an Analysis of Test Results

To display an analysis of test results:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RESULTS

ERROR

ANALYSIS

none

Section

Line

Path Analysis

VT Analysis

Pattern Analysis

DSn Path

Analysis

Tables 3–24 through 3–30 detail the error analysis that appears on

the ERROR ANALYSIS page. With the exception of the error count,

the analysis of the error conditions that appear on the ERROR

ANALYSIS page is made up of two numbers. The first number is the

number of seconds the condition existed. The second number is the

percentage of the test duration that the condition existed.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–177

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Results

Table 3–24: T1M1 Section Analysis Results Displayed on the ERROR

ANALYSIS Page

Category

Type

Section Analysis (B1 BIP)

Analysis Result

Section

Error Counts

Errored Seconds

Errored Seconds – Type A

Errored Seconds – Type B

Severely Errored Seconds

Severely Errored Framing

Seconds

Error Free Seconds

Table 3–25: T1M1 Line Analysis Results Displayed on the ERROR

ANALYSIS Page

Category

Type

Analysis Result

Line

Line Analysis (B2 BIP)

Error Counts

Errored Seconds

Errored Seconds – Type A

Errored Seconds – Type B

Severely Errored Seconds

Unavailable Seconds

Error Free Seconds

Error Counts

Line Analysis (FEBE)

Errored Seconds

Unavailable Seconds

Error Free Seconds

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–178

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Results

Table 3–26: T1M1 Path Analysis Results Displayed on the ERROR

ANALYSIS Page

Category

Type

Path Analysis (B3 BIP)

Analysis Result

Path

Error Counts

Errored Seconds

Errored Seconds – Type A

Errored Seconds – Type B

Severely Errored Seconds

Unavailable Seconds

Error Free Seconds

Error Counts

Path Analysis (FEBE)

Errored Seconds

Unavailable Seconds

Error Free Seconds

Table 3–27: T1M1 VT1.5 Analysis Results Displayed on the ERROR

ANALYSIS Page

Category

Type

Analysis Result

VT 1.5 Analy- VT Analysis (V5 BIP)

sis

Error Counts

Errored Seconds

Errored Seconds – Type A

Errored Seconds – Type B

Severely Errored Seconds

Unavailable Seconds

Error Free Seconds

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–179

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Results

Table 3–27: T1M1 VT1.5 Analysis Results Displayed on the ERROR

ANALYSIS Page (Cont.)

Category

Type

Analysis Result

VT 1.5 Analysis (FEBE)

Error Counts

Errored Seconds

Unavailable Seconds

Error Free Seconds

Table 3–28: T1M1 Payload Analysis Results Displayed on ERROR

ANALYSIS Page

Category

Type

Analysis Result

Payload

Payload Analysis (Bit Error)

Error Counts

Errored Seconds

Errored Seconds – Type A

Errored Seconds – Type B

Severely Errored Seconds

Unavailable Seconds

Error Free Seconds

NOTE. There is no analysis performed on unframed DS1 or DS3

signals.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–180

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Results

Table 3–29: DS1 Path Analysis Results Displayed on ERROR

ANALYSIS Page

Category

Type

DS1 Analysis (Frame Bit)

Analysis Result

DS1 Path

Error Counts

Errored Seconds

Errored Seconds – Type A

Errored Seconds – Type B

Severely Errored Seconds

Unavailable Seconds

Error Free Seconds

Table 3–30: DS3 Path Analysis Results Displayed on ERROR

ANALYSIS Page

Category

Type

Analysis Result

DS3 Path

DS3 Analysis (P-Bit Parity)

Error Counts

Errored Seconds

Errored Seconds – Type A

Errored Seconds – Type B

Severely Errored Seconds

Unavailable Seconds

Error Free Seconds

Viewing Measurement Histories

The CTS 710 records measurement histories whenever you run a test.

Measurement histories are displayed as graphs. The graph displays

how an individual measurement changed over time. The vertical axis

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–181

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Results

of a graph depends on what is displayed, but the horizontal axis

always displays time.

To display a history graph:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RESULTS

HISTORY

GRAPHS

none

Types of Graphs

There are three types of history graphs: bar graphs, line graphs, and

on/off graphs.

Bar Graphs. Bar graphs are used for most measurements (see

Figure 3–58). There are two kinds of bar graphs: a count graph that

displays code violations and pointer justifications and an errored

seconds graph that displays errored seconds. Table 3–31 lists the

different bar graphs that can be displayed.

Figure 3–58: Bar Graphs Showing Code Violations and Errored Seconds

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–182

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Results

Table 3–31: Measurements Displayed as Bar Graphs

Measurement

Section B1 Error Counts

Section B1 Errored Secs

Line B2 Error Counts

Line B2 Errored Secs

Line FEBE Error Counts

Path B3 Error Counts

Path B3 Errored Secs

Path FEBE Error Counts

Pattern Error Counts

Pattern Errored Secs

STS Pointer Justifications

VT Pointer Justifications

VT BIP2 Errors

VT BIP2 Errored Secs

VT FEBE Error Count

VT FEBE Errored Secs

CRC/Parity Errored Seconds

Frame Errored Seconds

Line Graphs. A line graph is used to display pointer movement

history (see Figure 3–59). The vertical axis of the line graph ranges

from 0 to the maximum, which is different for SPEs and VTs. There

is only one measurement displayed as a line graph, as shown in

Table 3–32.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–183

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Results

Figure 3–59: Line Graph Showing Pointer Value

Table 3–32: Measurements Displayed as a Line Graph

Displayed Value

STS Pointer Value

VT Pointer Value

On/Off Graphs. On/off graphs indicate whether alarms and failures

were on or off (see Figure 3–60). There are only two types of on/off

graphs, as shown in Table 3–33. One type displays alarms and the

other type displays failures.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–184

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Results

Figure 3–60: On/Off Graphs Showing Failures and Alarms

Table 3–33: Measurements Displayed as On/Off Graphs for SONET

Rates

Graph Type

Displayed Value

Failures

LOS

LOF

OOF

STS LOP

VT LOP

VT LOM

Power

L-AIS

SONET Alarms

L-FERF

P-AIS

P-FERF

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–185

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Results

Table 3–33: Measurements Displayed as On/Off Graphs for SONET

Rates (Cont.)

Graph Type

Displayed Value

VT AIS

VT FERF

Pattern

Table 3–34: Measurements Displayed as On/Off Graphs for Tributary

Rates

Graph Type

Displayed Value

DSn Alarms

Idle

AIS

Yellow

Elements of the History Graph Display

Figure 3–61 shows the elements of a typical history graph display.

The HISTORY GRAPHS page always displays two graphs. The two

graphs can be changed to display any measurement taken during a

test.

Graph Name

Above each graph is a name that identifies the measurement the

graph illustrates.

History Resolution

Above the graph name is a line that states the minimum resolution at

which the graph can be displayed. The minimum resolution is set at

the time the test is run.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–186

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Results

Power Out Indicator

If the power to the CTS 710 fails while a test is running, the

CTS 710 displays the words “POWEROUT” on the history graph.

POWEROUT is displayed vertically on the graph and spans the

period of time the CTS 710 was without power.

Cursor

The cursor is a line that is scrolled across the graph using the knob.

Cursor Position

Just below the menu name is a line that identifies the position of the

cursor. Cursor position is identified by time and date.

Measurement Results at Cursor Position

To the right of the graph name is a box that displays the value of the

measurement at the cursor location (the box is not displayed for

history graphs of alarms or failures). If the displayed graph

represents errored seconds, the measurement results box displays the

number of errored seconds that occurred during the interval

indicated. If the displayed graph represents an error count, the

measurement results box displays the number of errors counted

during the indicated interval and the resulting bit error rate (BER).

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–187

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Results

Cursor position

Graph name

History

Resolution

Measurement

results at

cursor position

Cursor

Power

Out

Indicator

Cross-hatch

means the test

was not running

during this time

Figure 3–61: Elements of a History Graph

Zooming History Graphs

History graphs display measurement history in intervals. Each

interval is represented by a bar on the history graph. The interval of

time represented by a bar can be changed. Changing the interval a

bar represents is called zooming. History graphs can be zoomed out

or in. When a history graph is zoomed out, a bar represents a

increasingly longer period of time. When a history graph is zoomed

in, a bar represents a decreasingly shorter period of time. Table 3–35

lists the intervals a bar can represent, depending on the history

resolution setting when the test was run.

Table 3–35: Time Represented by Bars on History Graph

History Resolution = Normal

(1 min samples)

History Resolution = Low

(15 min samples)

1 minute

15 minutes

60 minutes

5 minutes

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–188

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Results

Table 3–35: Time Represented by Bars on History Graph (Cont.)

History Resolution = Normal

(1 min samples)

History Resolution = Low

(15 min samples)

15 minutes

60 minutes

4 hours

12 hours

There are 56 intervals of a history graph displayed on the screen at a

time. At a resolution of one minute per bar, a history graph displays

test results for a period of 56 minutes. At a resolution of 15 minutes

per bar, a history graph displays test results for a period of 840

minutes, or 14 hours.

The minimum test duration required to display results on a history

graph is one minute. Tests shorter than one minute will not display

any results on the HISTORY GRAPHS page. However, test results

do appear on the MAIN RESULTS and ERROR ANALYSIS pages

for tests shorter than one minute.

The longest period for which test results are displayed is 72 hours

(3 days) at a History Resolution of 1 minute or 1080 hours (45 days)

at a History Resolution of 15 minutes. If you run a test continuously,

only results for the last 72 hours (1 minute resolution) or 1080 hours

(15 minutes resolution) are maintained in memory.

To zoom in a history graph, select Zoom In.

To zoom out a history graph, select Zoom Out.

NOTE. When viewing long test durations (for example, three days) at

a resolution of one minute, you might see a timestamp error. For

example, you might see two one-minute intervals stamped with the

same time. The timestamp error is simply revealing the clock

accuracy. The correct number of intervals for the test duration are

present.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–189

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Results

Panning History Graphs

You can display different portions of a history graph by panning the

graph. Panning a history graph shifts the displayed section of the

graph to the left or right.

At the maximum resolution of one minute per bar, a history graph

can display only about one hour of test results. To maintain

maximum resolution, you can display the graph at maximum

resolution (one minute per bar) and pan to other portions of the

history graph as necessary.

To pan a history graph, turn the knob.

When the knob is turned, the cursor moves across the history graph.

If the history graph contains more data than will fit on the display,

the history graph shifts to display additional information. The

direction the display shifts depends on which direction the knob is

turning.

Changing the Displayed History Graph

To change the displayed history graph:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RESULTS

HISTORY

GRAPHS

Show Next Top

Change Top

Change Bottom

select graph with Select Graph

knob

(see Figure 3–62)

H Select Show Next Top to automatically display the next graph on

the top half of the screen.

H Select Change Top to select a different graph for display on the

top half of the screen.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–190

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Results

H Select Change Bottom to select a different graph for display on

the bottom half of the screen.

H Select Cancel if you decide not to change the displayed graph.

Displaying Mini-Graphs

When you select either Change Top or Change Bottom from the

HISTORY GRAPHS page, the selected graph is replaced by three

mini-graphs (see Figure 3–62). Each mini-graph is a reduced-size

version of a normal graph. Turn the knob to display a different graph.

The middle graph, which is highlighted, is the graph that will be

displayed full-size when you choose Select Graph. When you turn

the knob, the mini-graphs scroll either up or down depending on

which direction you turn the knob. Whether the next mini-graph

appears at the top or the bottom depends on the direction the knob

turns.

Use the mini-graph capability to view several results at once. With

mini-graphs displayed, the CTS 710 displays four graphs at the same

time. This will enable you to see relationships between different

results that might otherwise be difficult to spot.

Figure 3–62: Changing the Displayed History Graph

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–191

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Results

Saving and Recalling Results

You can save test results to disk and recall the test results for later

display and analysis. The CTS 710 automatically saves the results of

the last two tests in memory. If you want to save test results

permanently, you must save the test results to disk.

Saving Test Results to Disk

NOTE. The CTS 710 saves only the last 3 days (at a History

Resolution of Normal) or 45 days (at a History Resolution of Low) of

test results. If a test runs longer than these limits, the results older

than 3 days/45 days are discarded.

To save test results to disk:

1. Name the test results file as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RESULTS

SAVE RESULTS Name

(see Figure 3–63)

RESLT_XX

Clear

EDIT NAME

H If you wish to name the results file as RESLT<Number>, you

can save time by selecting RESLT_XX. Once you select

RESLT_XX, select EDIT NAME and edit XX to the desired

number (or letter). Select DONE when you are finished

editing the setup name.

H Select Clear to remove an existing name. A message appears

to remind you that you cannot save results to disk without a

name.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–192

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Results

H Select EDIT NAME to enter a name other than RESLT_XX

for the pass/fail test. Select DONE when you are finished

editing the test name.

Figure 3–63: The SAVE RESULTS Page

2. Enter a description of the test results file as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RESULTS

SAVE RESULTS Description

EDIT TEXT

None

Clear

H Select EDIT TEXT to enter a description of the test results,

up to 24 characters long. Select DONE when you are finished

editing the description.

H Select None if you do not want to use a description.

H Select Clear to remove an existing description.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–193

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Results

3. Save the test results to disk as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RESULTS

SAVE RESULTS Save to Disk

Save Current

Save Previous

At the bottom of the SAVE RESULTS page are two lines that

identify the current and previous tests by start time/date and by

duration.

H Select Save Current to save the current (most recent) test

results.

H Select Save Previous to save the previous test results.

Recalling Test Results from Disk

To recall test results from disk:

1. Insert the disk containing the test results into the disk drive.

2. Select and recall the test results file as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RESULTS

RECALL

RESULTS

Disk

(see Figure 3–64)

select disk file

name

Recall Result

NOTE. The Disk action displays only files with the extensions .HST

and .MST. It does not display any other files on the disk.

To verify that the file has been recalled, select the TEST

SUMMARY page and look at the Results Source line at the top of

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–194

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Results

the page. The Results Source line will display the name of the file

recalled.

Figure 3–64: The RECALL RESULTS Page

Deleting Test Results from Disk

To delete test results from disk:

1. Insert the disk containing the test results into the disk drive.

2. Select the test results file to be deleted, as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RESULTS

RECALL

RESULTS

Disk

(see Figure 3–64)

select disk file

name

Delete File

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Results

Recalling Test Results from Memory

To recall test results from memory:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

RESULTS

RECALL

RESULTS

Memory

(see Figure 3–64)

select Current or Recall Result

Printing Results

There are two ways to print out the results of the current test. One

way is to tell the CTS 710 which results to print from the print dialog

box. The second way is to display the results you wish to print out

and then print the displayed screen (this is the only way to print out

history graphs).

Results are printed according to the Printer Type, which is set on the

PRINTER SETUP page (see page 3–203). Results can be printed to a

printer or to a disk file. Results are printed to disk in three formats:

Windows BMP format, Interleaf image format, and Encapsulated

PostScript format.

Printing Main Results or Error Analysis

When the CTS 710 prints test results, it prints out the contents of the

MAIN RESULTS page or the ERROR ANALYSIS page. The printed

results are reformatted so that all results fit on a single page.

Before printing results, check that the printer setup is correct. The

printer setup is displayed on the PRINTER SETUP page of the

UTILITY menu.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–196

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Results

To print the results of the current test:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

(see Figure 3–65)

Print Main

Results

Print Error

Analysis

Abort

EXIT

H Highlight Print Main Results and then select Print to print the

contents of the MAIN RESULTS page.

H Highlight Print Error Analysis and then select Print to print the

contents of the ERROR ANALYSIS page.

H Select Abort to cancel a printout in process.

H Select EXIT if you decide not to print out any test results.

Figure 3–65: The PRINT CONTROL Dialog Box

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–197

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Results

To print the results of a test saved on disk, recall the results (see

page 3–194) and then print as previously described.

To print the results of the previous test, recall the previous test (see

page 3–196) and then print as previously described.

Printing History Graphs

To print a history graph from the CTS 710:

1. Display the history graph you want to print.

The history graph can be for the current test or the previous test

or it can be recalled from disk.

2. Print the history graph as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Print Last Screen Print

(see Figure 3–65)

Abort

EXIT

H Select Print to print the displayed history graph using the

settings on the PRINTER SETUP page of the UTILITY

menu.

H Select EXIT if you decide not to print any test results.

H Select Abort to cancel a printout in process.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–198

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing Instrument Settings

This section describes how to change the date and time settings,

printer settings, and the GPIB and RS-232 parameters. This section

describes how to display a screen that details the CTS 710 configura-

tion. You will also find a description of how to run the instrument

self-test in this section.

Viewing the Instrument Configuration

You can display a page that describes how the CTS 710 is configured

as well as the installed options and the hardware and firmware

revision level.

To display the instrument configuration:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

UTILITY

INSTR CONFIG

none

Table 3–36 describes the lines of the INSTR CONFIG page.

Table 3–36: Lines of the Instrument Configuration Page

Line

Description

Model

The model number of the instrument.

Serial Number

Hardware Revision

Firmware Revision

Options

The serial number of the instrument.

The version of hardware.

The version of firmware.

Separates information that applies to

every instrument from information

about optional configurations.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–199

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing Instrument Settings

Table 3–36: Lines of the Instrument Configuration Page (Cont.)

Line

Description

Interface Module

Displays which interface module is

installed (supported transmit and

receive rates) and wavelength of

module, if optical.

DS1/DS3 Option

Indicates whether the DS1/DS3

Add/Drop/Test option is installed.

Setting the Display Brightness

You can set the display brightness to three levels: Low, Medium, and

High.

To set the display brightness:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

UTILITY

MISC SETTINGS

(see Figure 3–66)

Display

Brightness

Low

Medium

High

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–200

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing Instrument Settings

Figure 3–66: The MISC SETTINGS Page

Turning the Beeper On and Off

The CTS 710 has a beeper. The beeper is used alert you when a

pass/fail test has completed, or when certain conditions occur. You

can turn off the beeper if you wish.

To turn the beeper on or off:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

UTILITY

MISC SETTINGS

(see Figure 3–66)

Beeper

Off

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–201

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing Instrument Settings

Setting the Date

The date is used when writing files to disk, it is used to track

measurement history, and it is used when displaying history graphs.

To set the date:

1. Display the current date setting as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

UTILITY

MISC SETTINGS

Current Date

SET DATE

After you select SET DATE, the CTS 710 enters Edit Mode.

2. Assign the knob by selecting Year, Month, or Day as necessary.

3. Turn the knob to change the setting.

4. Select CANCEL to abort any changes and exit Edit Mode.

5. Select DONE to enter your changes and exit Edit Mode.

Setting the Time

The time is used when writing files to disk, it is used to track

measurement history, and it is used when displaying history graphs.

To set the time:

1. Display the current time as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

UTILITY

MISC SETTINGS

(see Figure 3–66)

Current Time

SET TIME

After you select SET TIME, the CTS 710 enters Edit Mode.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–202

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing Instrument Settings

NOTE. While you set the time in Edit Mode, the clock stops running.

2. Assign the knob by selecting Hour, Minute, or Second as

necessary.

3. Turn the knob to change the setting.

4. Select CANCEL to abort any changes and exit Edit Mode.

5. Select DONE to enter your changes and exit Edit Mode.

Changing the Printer Setup

The CTS 710 prints to Tek DPU-411 printers, Epson-compatible

printers, and Hewlett-Packard Thinkjet printers. It can also print to a

file on disk. The print parameters are located on the PRINTER

SETUP page of the UTILITY menu (see Figure 3–67). Printers are

supported only by an RS-232 connection.

Figure 3–67: The PRINTER SETUP Page

Setting up the CTS 710 for a printer consists of two steps, specifying

the printer or file type and setting RS-232 parameters. Additionally,

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–203

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing Instrument Settings

you can specify two lines of text to be included on any printout. The

two lines of text identify the user name and the company name.

Specifying the Printer or File Type

To set the printer or file type:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

UTILITY

PRINTER

SETUP

Printer Type

Tek DPU-411

Epson

Thinkjet

To Disk

BMP Format

To Disk

Ileaf Format

To Disk

EPS Format

H Select To Disk BMP Format to print a file to disk in Windows

bitmap format.

H Select To Disk Ileaf Format to print a file to disk in Interleaf

image format.

H Select To Disk EPS Format to print a file to disk in Encapsu-

lated PostScript format.

Setting RS-232 Parameters

To determine the correct RS-232 settings for your printer, refer to the

manual that came with your printer.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–204

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing Instrument Settings

To set the RS-232 parameters for the printer:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

UTILITY

PRINTER

SETUP

Baud Rate

1200

2400

4800

9600

Stop Bits

Parity

None

Odd

Even

None

Software

Hardware

H/W & S/W

Flow Control

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–205

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing Instrument Settings

Setting the Print User & Company Text

You can have the CTS 710 include text on a printout that identifies

the user name and company name. Including this text is optional.

To set the user name and company name:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

UTILITY

PRINTER

SETUP

Print User &

Company

Off

EDIT TEXT

User Name

Company Name

H The User Name and Company Name fields are 20 characters

long. Select DONE when you are finished editing the name.

Setting Remote Control Parameters

You can control the CTS 710 using a General Purpose Interface Bus

(GPIB) or an RS-232 connection. For information on remote control

commands, refer to the CTS 710 Programmer Manual.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–206

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing Instrument Settings

Setting the GPIB Address

To set the CTS 710 GPIB address:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

UTILITY

REMOTE

CONTROL

GPIB Primary

Address (see

Figure 3–68)

Default 4

Inc

Dec

Offline

H Select Default 4 to set the GPIB address to its default value.

H Select Inc to increment the GPIB address.

H Select Dec to decrement the GPIB address.

H Select Offline to place the CTS 710 in the offline state.

H The maximum GPIB address value is 30. The minimum GPIB

address value is 0.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–207

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing Instrument Settings

Figure 3–68: The REMOTE CONTROL Page

Setting RS-232 Parameters

The appropriate settings for RS-232 parameters depend on how the

controller is set up. Refer to the user manual that came with your

controller to determine the correct settings.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–208

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing Instrument Settings

To set the remote control RS-232 parameters:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

UTILITY

REMOTE

CONTROL

Baud Rate

1200

(see Figure 3–68)

2400

4800

9600

Stop Bits

Parity

None

Odd

Even

Off

Hardware

Handshake

Software

Handshake

None

Xon/Xoff

Off

Data Carrier

Detect

Tx Delay

(Seconds)

Inc

Dec

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–209

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing Instrument Settings

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

Tx Terminator

CR/LF

LF/CR

H For Tx Delay, select one of the preset choices or use Inc and Dec

to specify a value different from the preset choices.

H The maximum value for Tx Delay is 60. The minimum value

is 0.

Running Instrument Self Tests

The CTS 710 provides self-contained tests that can be run any time

you suspect the CTS 710 may not be performing properly.

The only test you might need to perform is the Power up Self Test.

The other self tests available for selection are for servicing the

instrument. Complete details on the self tests are located in the

CTS 710 SONET Test Set & CTS 750 SDH Test Set Service manual.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–210

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing Instrument Settings

Running the Power Up Self Test

To run the power up self test:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

UTILITY

SELF TEST

Self Test Group

Power up

Self Test

Self Test Loop

Once

Self Test Control Run

H Select Abort to stop a self test in progress.

If your CTS 710 fails the self test, contact the nearest Tektronix

Service Center.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–211

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing Instrument Settings

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

3–212

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendices

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix A: Menu Maps

TEST CONTROL Page

Test Duration

5 min

History Resolution

15 min

1 hour

Continuous

USER

DEFINED

Normal

(1 min)

Low

(15 min)

RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS Page

Memory

0. DEFAULT

1. Named when saved

2. Named when saved

3. Named when saved

4. Named when saved

5. Named when saved

Recall

Setup

Disk

Choices depend on disk content

Recall

Setup

Delete File

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS Page

Disk

Choices depend on disk content

Recall &

Run Test

Delete File

SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS Page

Name

SETUP_XX

Clear

Description

Save to Memory

Save To Disk

EDIT NAME

None

Clear

EDIT TEXT

Memory 1

Memory 2

Memory 3

Memory 4

Memory 5

Save File

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS Page

Name

TEST_XX

Description

Clear

Operator Start Prompt

Test Duration

Fail If

Operator End Prompt

On Test Completion

Save to Disk

EDIT NAME

None

Clear

EDIT TEXT

Default

Clear

Preview

EDIT TEXT

5 min

15 min

1 hour

Continuous

USER

DEFINED

Up to four fail if

conditions can be

specified

Default

Clear

Preview

EDIT TEXT

Nothing

Summary

Save to

Disk

Save File

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

TRANSMIT SETTINGS Page (1 of 2)

Transmit Rate

Transmit Clock

Transmit Level

Signal Structure

STS Under Test

Mapping

STS-1

STS-3

OC-1

OC-3

OC-12

DS1

VT Under Test

Payload

DS3

Test Pattern

Background Pattern

Tx/Rx Settings

Internal

Recovered

External

BITS

(Rate=STS-1 and

STS-3 only)

Cross

Connect

High

(Rate=STS-1/

OC-1)

(Rate=STS-3/ (Rate=OC-12)

OC-3)

12 x STS-1

1 x STS-1

3 x STS-1

4 x STS-3c

1 x STS-3c

(Structure=

1 x STS-1)

(Structure=

3 x STS-1)

(Structure=

1 x STS-3c)

(Structure=

(Structure= 4 x STS-3c)

12 x STS-1)

Bulk Fill

No Mapping

(Equipped)

Bulk Fill

No Mapping

(UnEquipped)

VT1.5

Async

DS3

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

TRANSMIT SETTINGS Page (2 of 2)

(Mapping=

Transmit Rate

Transmit Clock

Transmit Level

Signal Structure

STS Under Test

Mapping

VT1.5 Async)

VT #1

VT #28

VT Under Test

Payload

(Mapping=VT1.5 Async)

(Mapping=DS3)

Test Pattern

Background Pattern

Tx/Rx Settings

DS1

DS3

Ext Add

DS1

Unframed

DS3

Unframed

DS1

SF (D4)

DS3

C–bit

DS1 ESF

DS3 M13

(Mapping=VT1.5 Async)

(Mapping=DS3)

PRBS

2^23–1

PRBS

2^23–1

PRBS

2^20–1

PRBS

2^20–1

PRBS

2^15–1

PRBS

2^15–1

QRSS

2^20–1

All Ones

All Zeros

All Ones

All Zeros

1 in 8

User Word

8 bit

User Word

16 bit

3 in 24

User Word

24 bit

User Word

8 bit

User Word

16 bit

User Word

24 bit

(Mapping=

VT1.5 Async)

QRSS

2^20–1

Independ-

ent

Coupled

Through

Mode

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

ERRORS & ALARMS Page (1 of 4)

Error Type set to

Error Rate set to

Transmit Alarm set to

Transmit Failure set to

(Mapping=

(Mapping=DS3)

None

No Mapping) VT1.5 Async)

Section B1

Line B2

None

Section B1

Line B2

Section B1

Line B2

Path B3

Path FEBE

Pattern Bit

Path B3

Path FEBE

VT BIP

Path FEBE

Pattern Bit

VT FEBE

Pattern Bit

(Mapping=VT1.5 Async (Mapping=DS3 &

& Payload=

DS1 SF (D4))

Payload=

DS3 C–bit)

None

Section B1

Line B2

Section B1

Line B2

Path B3

Path FEBE

Frame Bit

Pattern Bit

C–Bit

Path FEBE

Frame Bit

VT BIP

VT FEBE

Pattern Bit

(Mapping=VT1.5 Async (Mapping=DS3 &

& Payload=DS1 ESF)

Payload=DS3 M13)

None

Section B1

Line B2

Section B1

Line B2

Path B3

Path FEBE

Frame Bit

VT BIP

Path FEBE

Frame Bit

Pattern Bit

P–Bit

VT FEBE

Pattern Bit

CRC (ESF)

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

ERRORS & ALARMS Page (2 of 4)

Error Type set to

Error Rate set to

Transmit Alarm set to

Transmit Failure set to

None

1e–3

1e–4

1e–5

1e–6

1e–7

1e–8

USER

DEFINED

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

ERRORS & ALARMS Page (3 of 4)

Error Type set to

Error Rate set to

Transmit Alarm set to

Transmit Failure set to

(Mapping=

(Mapping=DS3)

None

No Mapping) VT1.5 Async &

Payload=DS1

Ext Add)

None

Line AIS

Line FERF

Path AIS

None

Line FERF

Line AIS

Path AIS

Path FERF

Line FERF

Path FERF

Path AIS

Path FERF

VT AIS

VT FERF

(Mapping=VT1.5

Async & Payload=

DS1 Unframed)

(Mapping=DS3 &

Payload=DS3 C–bit or

DS3 M13)

None

Line AIS

Line FERF

Path AIS

Path FERF

VT AIS

Line AIS

Line FERF

Path AIS

Path FERF

DSn Yellow

DSn AIS

DSn Idle

VT FERF

DSn AIS

(Mapping=VT1.5

Async & Payload=

DS1 SF (D4) or

DS1 ESF)

None

Line AIS

Line FERF

Path AIS

Path FERF

VT AIS

VT FERF

DSn Yellow

DSn AIS

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

ERRORS & ALARMS Page (4 of 4)

Error Type set to

Error Rate set to

Transmit Alarm set to

Transmit Failure set to

(Mapping=

(Mapping=DS3)

No Mapping) VT1.5 Async)

None

LOS

LOF

STS LOP

VT LOP

VT LOM

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

POINTERS & TIMING Page (1 of 3)

Pointer/Timing Mode

Offset Mode

Pointer

Movement

Frequency

Offset

Frequency Offset

Pointer Type

Pointer

Sequence Type

Pointer Control

Pointer Value Set to

Set with New Data Flag

Pointer Rate

Sequences

(Pointer/Timing Mode=

Frequency Offset)

Line

Pointer Direction

Burst Size

Payload

Initialization Time

Cool Down Time

(Pointer/Timing Mode=

Frequency Offset)

Max +100ppm

Stress +4.6ppm

Stress –4.6ppm

Default 0ppm

USER DEFINED

STS Pointer

VT Pointer

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

POINTERS & TIMING Page (2 of 3)

(Pointer/Timing Mode=

Pointer Sequences &

Pointer Type=

(Pointer/Timing Mode=

Pointer Sequences &

Pointer Type=

Pointer/Timing Mode

Offset Mode

Frequency Offset

Pointer Type

Sequence Type

Pointer Control

Pointer Value Set to

Set with New Data Flag

Pointer S-Bits

Pointer Rate

Pointer Direction

Burst Size

Initialization Time

Cool Down Time

STS Pointer)

VT Pointer)

Single

Burst

Single

Burst

Phase

Transient

Phase

Transient

Periodic

Continuous

Periodic

Continuous

Periodic

Continuous

With Cancel

Periodic

Continuous

With Cancel

Periodic

Continuous

With Add

Periodic

Continuous

With Add

Periodic

87–3

Periodic

26–1

Periodic

87–3

With Cancel

Periodic

26–1

With Cancel

Periodic

87-3

With Add

Periodic

26-1

With Add

Single

Alternating

Single

Alternating

Double

Alternating

Double

Alternating

Single

Burst

Set Value

Continuous

(Pointer Control=Set Value)

Min 0

Max 782

Default

522

Illegal

(Max +1)

USER

DEFINED

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

POINTERS & TIMING Page (3 of 3)

Pointer/Timing Mode

Offset Mode

Frequency Offset

(Pointer Control=Set Value)

Yes

Pointer Type

Sequence Type

Pointer Control

Pointer Value Set to

Set with New Data Flag

Pointer S-Bits

Pointer Rate

Pointer Direction

Burst Size

(Pointer Control=Set Value)

Initialization Time

Cool Down Time

(Pointer Control=

Continuous)

(Pointer/Timing Mode=

Pointer Sequences &

Sequence Type=Periodic

type)

Max

2ms

34 ms

Min

10000ms

100 ms

1000 ms

10000ms

Default

50ms

USER

DEFINED

USER

DEFINED

(Pointer Control=

Continuous)

(Pointer/Timing Mode=

Pointer Sequences)

Increment

Decrement

Alternate

Increment

Decrement

(Pointer Control=Burst)

(Pointer/Timing

Mode=Pointer Sequences)

Off

(Pointer/Timing

Mode=Pointer Sequences)

Off

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

APS COMMANDS Page (1 of 3)

APS Mode

K1 Full Byte

Bits 1–4:

Span

Ring

Bits 5–8:

K2 Full Byte

Bits 1–4:

Set to

00000000

Set to

11111111

Bit 5:

Bits 6–8:

Default

10101010

Transmit Setup

EDIT BYTE

(APS Mode=Ring)

(APS Mode=Span)

NR No Request

RR–R Reverse Request Ring

RR–S Reverse Request Span

EXER–R Exerciser Ring

EXER–S Exerciser Span

WTR Wait To Restore

DNR Do Not Revert

RR Reverse Request

Not Used

EXER Exerciser

Not Used

MS–S Manual Switch Ring

MS–S Manual Switch Span

SD–R Signal Degrade Ring

SD–S Signal Degrade Span

SD–P Signal Degrade Protection

SF–R Signal Fail Ring

WTR Wait to Restore

Not Used

MS Manual Switch

Not Used

SD Signal Degrade Low

SD Signal Degrade High

SF Signal Fail Low

SF Signal Fail High

FS Forced Switch

LP Lockout of Protection

SF–S Signal Fail Span

FS–R Forced Switch Ring

FS–S Forced Switch Span

LP–S Lockout of Protection Span

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

APS COMMANDS Page (2 of 3)

APS Mode

K1 Full Byte

Bits 1–4:

Bits 5–8:

K2 Full Byte

Bits 1–4:

Bit 5:

Bits 6–8:

Transmit Setup

#0 (0000)

#1 (0001)

#2 (0010)

#3 (0011)

#4 (0100)

#5 (0101)

#6 (0110)

#7 (0111)

#8 (1000)

#9 (1001)

#10 (1010)

#11 (1011)

#12 (1100)

#13 (1101)

#14 (1110)

#15 (1111)

Set to

00000000

Set to

11111111

Default

10101010

EDIT BYTE

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

APS COMMANDS Page (3 of 3)

APS Mode

#0 (0000)

K1 Full Byte

#1 (0001)

Bits 1–4:

#2 (0010)

#3 (0011)

#4 (0100)

#5 (0101)

#6 (0110)

#7 (0111)

#8 (1000)

#9 (1001)

#10 (1010)

#11 (1011)

#12 (1100)

#13 (1101)

#14 (1110)

#15 (1111)

Bits 5–8:

K2 Full Byte

Bits 1–4:

Bit 5:

Bits 6–8:

Transmit Setup

(APS Mode=Span)

(APS Mode=Ring)

1+1

1:N

Short

Long

IDLE

BR Bridged

BR & SW Bridged & Switched

Not Used

FERF

AIS

Transmit User Setup

Transmit Default

Transmit Illegal

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

TRANSPORT OVERHEAD Page

Showing Overhead for

External Add

Choices depend on

transmit rate

None

D1–D3

D4–D12

Reset

Overhead

D10

D11

D12

Set to

10101010

Set to

11111111

Default

xxxxxxxx

EDIT BYTE

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

PATH OVERHEAD Page

Overhead View

External Add

STS Path

Overhead

Byte

None

(Overhead View=

STS Path Overhead)

Reset

Overhead

Set to

10101010

Set to

11111111

Default

xxxxxxxx

(Overhead View=

V5 Byte)

EDIT BYTE

Reset

Overhead

Set to

10101010

Set to

11111111

Default

xxxxxxxx

EDIT BYTE

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

RECEIVE SETTINGS Page (1 of 2)

Receive Rate

Receive Level

Signal Structure

STS Under Test

Mapping

STS-1

STS-3

OC-1

OC-3

OC-12

DS1

VT Under Test

Payload

DS3

Tributary Drop

Test Pattern

Tx/Rx Settings

DS3DS1 Demux

(Rate=

STS-1/STS-3)

(Rate=

DS3)

(Rate=

DS1)

Cross

Normal

Monitor

Normal

Monitor

Bridge

Connect

Low

(Rate=

STS-1/OC-1)

(Rate=

STS-3/OC-3)

(Rate=

OC-12)

STS-1

STS-3C

1 ... 12

(depending on Rate

and Structure)

Mapping

(Equipped)

Mapping

(UnEquipped)

VT1.5

Async

DS3

(Mapping=VT1.5)

VT #1

VT #28

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

RECEIVE SETTINGS Page (2 of 2)

Receive Rate

Signal Structure

STS Under Test

Mapping

VT Under Test

Payload

(Mapping=DS3)

(Mapping=VT1.5)

DS3

Unframed

DS1

Unframed

DS3 C–bit

DS3 M13

DS1 SF (D4)

DS1 ESF

Tributary Drop

Test Pattern

Tx/Rx Settings

(Mapping=DS3)

(Mapping=VT1.5)

On AMI

Off

On B8ZS

Off

(Mapping=

(Mapping=VT1.5

Rate=DS3)

(Mapping= DS3)

No Mapping)

PRBS

2^23–1

PRBS

2^23–1

PRBS

2^23–1

PRBS

2^20–1

PRBS

2^20–1

PRBS

2^20–1

PRBS

2^15–1

PRBS

2^15–1

PRBS

2^15–1

All Ones

All Zeros

PRBS

2^09–1

QRSS

2^20–1

User Word

8 bit

All Ones

All Zeros

1 in 8

All Zeros

User Word

Unknown

User Word

16 bit

3 in 24

User Word

24 bit

User Word

8 bit

Unknown

User Word

16 bit

User Word

24 bit

Unknown

Independ–

ent

Coupled

Through

Mode

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

SIGNAL STATUS Page

Expected Receive Rate

Received Optical Power

Received Peak Voltage

TRANSPORT OVERHEAD Page

Showing Overhead for

External Drop

Choices depend on

receive rate

Pause Control

None

D1–D3

D4–D12

D10

D11

Pause

D12

Continue

Bytes that can be viewed on this page

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

PATH OVERHEAD Page

Overhead View

External Drop

Pause Control

STS Path

Overhead

V5 Byte

(Overhead View=

STS Path Overhead)

None

View Only

(Overhead View=

V5 Byte)

View Only

TEST SUMMARY Page

Results Source:

Results Rate:

Results Mapping:

Test Started:

Displayed information is

taken from last test run.

Elapsed Time:

TROUBLE SCAN

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

MAIN RESULTS Page

Errors

Failures

Alarms

Pointers

ERROR ANALYSIS Page

Section

Analysis

Line

Analysis

Path

Analysis

VT1.5

Analysis

DS3

Analysis

Payload

Analysis

DS1

Analysis

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–22

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

HISTORY GRAPHS Page

Zoom In

(History Resolution=

Normal (1 min))

(History Resolution=

Low (15 min))

Zoom Out

Show

1 mins/bar

15 mins/bar

60 mins/bar

4 hrs/bar

Next Top

5 mins/bar

Change

Top

15 mins/bar

60 mins/bar

12 hrs/bar

Change

Bottom

(Receive Rate=

SONET Rate)

(Receive Rate=

DS1/DS3)

Failures

DS1/DS3 Alarms & Failures

Pattern Error Counts

Pattern Errored Secs

Frame Error Counts

Frame Error Seconds

CRC Error Counts

SONET Alarms

DS3 Alarms

Cancel

DS1 Alarms

Select

Graph

Section B1 Error Counts

Section B1 Errored Secs

Line B2 Error Counts

Line B2 Errored Secs

Line FEBE Error Counts

Path B3 Error Counts

Path B3 Errored Secs

Path FEBE Error Counts

Pattern Error Counts

Pattern Errored Secs

VT BIP2 Error Counts

VT BIP2 Errored Secs

VT FEBE Error Count

VT FEBE Errored Secs

STS Pointer Justification

STS Pointer Value

CRC Error Seconds

Cancel

Select

Graph

VT Pointer Justification

VT1.5 Pointer Value

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

SAVE RESULTS Page

Name

Description

Save To Disk

RESLT_XX

Clear

EDIT NAME

None

Clear

EDIT TEXT

Save

Current

Save

RECALL RESULTS Page

Memory

Current

Recall

Result

Disk

Choices depend on disk content

Recall

Result

Delete File

MISC SETTINGS Page

Display Brightness

Beeper

Current Date

Current Time

Low

Medium

High

Off

SET DATE

SET TIME

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–24

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

PRINTER SETUP Page

Printer Type

RS–232

Tek

DPU–411

Baud Rate

Epson

Stop Bits

Parity

Flow Control

Printer User & Company

User Name

Company Name

Thinkjet

To Disk

BMP Format

To Disk

Ileaf Format

To Disk

EPS Format

1200

2400

4800

9600

None

Odd

Even

None

Software

Hardware

H/W & S/W

Off

EDIT TEXT

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

REMOTE CONTROL Page

GPIB Primary Address

RS–232

Default 4

Inc

Baud Rate

Stop Bits

Parity

Dec

Offline

Hardware Handshake

Software Handshake

Data Carrier Detect

Tx Delay (Seconds)

Tx Terminator

1200

2400

4800

9600

None

Odd

Even

Off

None

Xon/Xoff

Off

Inc

Dec

CR/LF

LF/CR

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–26

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

INSTR CONFIG Page

Model:

Serial Number:

Hardware Revision:

Option Revision:

Firmware Revision:

Options:

Displayed information depends on instrument

Interface Module:

DS1/DS3 Option:

SELF TEST Page

Self Test Control

Self Test Group

Self Test Routine

Self Test Loop control

View Results

Run

Abort

Self Test

SYS Int.

SYS Ext.

Protocol Bd

Clock Bd

O/E Mod.

Tributary

CPU

Display

Front Panel

Disk

All

Once

Ten

Thousand

Until Error

Forever

Page Up

Page Down

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

A–28

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix B: Status and Error Messages

This appendix describes the status and error messages that appear on

the CTS 710 display. Status messages are statements about actions

the CTS 710 has completed. Status messages appear during normal

operation. Error messages are statements about actions the CTS 710

was unable to complete. Error messages appear when the CTS 710 is

unable to perform a requested action.

Status Messages

Autoscan complete. The CTS 710 has successfully completed the

Autoscan sequence.

Burst pointer movement transmitted. The POINTER ACTION button

was pressed with the Pointer Control set to Burst.

Disk root directory read. The CTS 710 has successfully read the disk

directory.

Factory settings restored, non-volatile settings cleared. This message

appears when the instrument is turned on after it was turned off

during a state change. The instrument settings were corrupted during

the shutdown and so the factory default settings were loaded at

turn-on and all information stored in RAM was cleared.

File has been deleted. The CTS 710 has successfully deleted the

selected file.

Hardcopy complete. The CTS 710 has successfully completed a

printout.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

B–1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix B: Status and Error Messages

Instrument factory reset complete. The recall of default factory

settings, from the RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS page, was

completed successfully.

Instrument returned to previous setup. This message appears if you

select Cancel while an Autoscan is in progress.

Instrument setup for received signal. The CTS 710 has completed an

Autoscan and has changed its settings to match those of the received

signal.

Internal diagnostics completed. An instrument self test has been

initiated and completed successfully.

No Setup file with ’.SET’ extension found. You selected the Disk action

on the RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS page and no instrument

setup files were found on the disk.

Previous power down instrument state restored. This message appears

when the CTS 710 turns on. It means that the settings in effect when

the CTS 710 was last turned off have been successfully restored.

Reading disk.... The CTS 710 is reading the disk directory.

Recall of instrument setup complete. This message confirms that the

recall of an instrument setup was successfully completed.

Recall of measurement results/histories complete. The CTS 710 has

successfully recalled the selected results from disk.

Recall of pass/fail test complete. The CTS 710 has successfully

recalled the selected pass/fail test from disk.

Save of instrument setup complete. This message confirms that an

instrument setup was successfully written to disk.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

B–2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix B: Status and Error Messages

Save of measurement results/histories complete. The CTS 710 has

successfully saved test results to disk.

Save of pass/fail test complete. The CTS 710 has successfully saved

the pass/fail test to disk.

Single pointer movement transmitted. You pressed the POINTER

ACTION button with the Pointer Control set to Single.

Test restarted due to change in receiver settings. You changed the

receive settings while a test was running. When any settings are

changed, a running test is restarted.

Transmit rate change complete. The CTS 710 has successfully

changed transmit rate. This message can occur when an instrument

setup file is recalled from disk.

Error Messages

Alarm generation invalid while in through mode. You attempted to

transmit an alarm while the CTS 710 was in Through Mode.

Transmit settings cannot be changed while the transmit rate is set to

Through Mode.

Autoscan already in progress. You pressed the Autoscan front-panel

button while an Autoscan was in progress.

Button disabled in edit mode. You pressed a front-panel button while

the CTS 710 was in edit mode. You must exit edit mode before you

can use the front-panel buttons.

Button disabled when dialog box is displayed. You pressed a

front-panel button while a dialog box (for example, PRINT

CONTROL) was displayed. Some front-panel buttons are disabled

while a dialog box is displayed. Exit the dialog box to enable all the

front-panel buttons.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

B–3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix B: Status and Error Messages

Can not insert tributary error/alarm while adding external signal. An

attempt was made to insert a tributary error or alarm while adding an

external signal.

Could not create disk file. The CTS 710 was unable to create a file on

the disk. Try saving the file on a different disk.

Could not delete file. You attempted to a delete a file and a disk error

occurred that prevented the CTS 710 from deleting the file. The file

is probably corrupted, though you might be able to fix the problem

with an MS-DOS disk recovery program.

Could not open disk file. The CTS 710 has attempted to read a file

from disk and was unable to do so. The file is probably corrupted,

though you might be able to recover the file using an MS-DOS file

recovery program.

Could not read disk’s root directory. The CTS 710 was unable to read

the disk directory. The disk directory is probably corrupted, though

you might be able to recover files from the disk with an MS-DOS

disk recovery utility.

Diagnostics invalid while disk or autoscan busy. You tried to run Self

Test diagnostics while accessing the disk or completing an Autoscan.

Wait until disk access is complete or the Autoscan is complete before

running a self test routine.

Disk file too large for memory buffer, truncated. You recalled a file and

it was too large to load into memory. This can occur if an instrument

settings file is recalled that has been edited on a PC and the edited

file is larger than the original file.

Disk has changed, operation aborted. You attempted to recall a disk

file and the disk has been changed since the directory was read.

Reinsert the original disk and recall the file again.

Disk is busy. You tried to save a file to disk while the disk was active.

Wait until the disk activity light turns off and save to disk again.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

B–4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix B: Status and Error Messages

Disk is full. You tried to save a file to disk and there is not enough

room on the disk for the file. Insert a disk with space available and

save the file again.

Disk not present in drive. You tried to save a file to disk, but no disk is

in the drive. Insert a formatted disk and save the file again.

Disk is write-protected, cannot write to file. You tried to save a file to a

disk that is write-protected.

Disk operation failed. A disk error occurred while reading or writing

to the disk. If you were trying to save a file to disk, save the file to a

different disk. If you were trying to read a file from disk, you might

be able to recover the file using an MS-DOS disk recovery program.

Error insertion disabled while in Through Mode. You pressed the

INSERT ERROR button while the CTS 710 was in Through Mode.

You cannot insert errors while the CTS 710 is in Through Mode

because the transmit signal must match the received signal.

Errors in test recall, test not loaded. The CTS 710 encountered disk

errors while recalling a pass/fail test and the operation was aborted.

You might be able to recover the file with an MS-DOS disk recovery

program.

Extra data in history file ignored. You recalled a history file that

contains extra data. This can occur if the history file has been edited

with a file editor and the edited file contains inappropriate informa-

tion.

Failure generation invalid while in through mode. You attempted to

transmit a failure while the CTS 710 was in Through Mode. Transmit

settings cannot be changed while the transmit rate is set to Through

Mode.

File name required. You entered a name for an instrument setup, a

pass/fail test, or a results file and then you removed the name by

selecting Clear. This message is just a reminder that a name must be

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

B–5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix B: Status and Error Messages

entered for the file to be saved to disk; that is, there is no default file

name.

Filename not found. This message appears if the disk was swapped

after the directory was read and you attempted to recall a file. Insert

the original disk and recall the file again.

File not read. A disk error occurred while reading a file. The file is

probably corrupted, though you might be able to recover the file with

an MS-DOS disk recovery program.

Frequency offset disabled with current transmit clock. You attempted

to change from Pointer/Timing Mode to Frequency Offset while the

transmit clock was set to External. Frequency Offset can be selected

only when the transmit clock is set to Internal or Recovered.

Hardcopy already in progress. You tried to start a printout while a

printout was already in progress. Wait until the current printout

completes and then select Print again.

Instrument unable to drop signal while transmitting current rate. You

attempted to turn on tributary drop while the transmit rate was set to

a tributary rate. Because the tributary transmit connector and

tributary drop connector are the same connector, you cannot transmit

a tributary signal and drop a tributary signal at the same time.

Internal diagnostics failed. A malfunction has occurred that requires

servicing. Contact a Tektronix representative for assistance.

Internal Error N: Contact Tektronix Service. A hardware malfunction

has occurred that requires servicing. Contact a Tektronix representa-

tive for assistance.

Internal format of file incorrect; file not read. You recalled a file that

does not contain data in the correct format. This occurs when a file is

recalled that happens to have the same extension as the type of

CTS 710 file being recalled, but it is not a CTS 710 file.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

B–6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix B: Status and Error Messages

Invalid history data format in file. You recalled a file that does not

contain data in the correct format. This occurs when a file is recalled

that happens to have the correct extension for a history file (and thus

shows up on the RECALL RESULTS page) even though it is not a

CTS 710 history file.

Loss of added signal. You have selected an externally generated

tributary signal, but no valid signal is present.

Loss of external clock. You have selected an external clock source

that does not have a valid clock source attached.

Measurements are running, recall not allowed. You tried to recall

instrument setups from memory or disk while a test is running. Wait

until the test is completed and then recall the file.

Measurements are running, results cannot be saved. You attempted to

save results to disk while a test was running. Wait until the test is

completed and then save the results to disk.

No Result file with ’.RES’ extension found. This message appears when

you select Disk (on the RECALL RESULTS page) but the disk does

not contain any results files.

Not available without tributary option. The requested action requires

that the Add/Drop/Test tributary option be installed.

No Test file with ’.TST’ extension found. This message appears when

you select Disk (on the RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS page) but the

disk does not contain any pass/fail test files.

Numeric value greater than maximum limit. You attempted to enter a

numeric value larger than the maximum value.

Numeric value less than minimum limit. You attempted to enter a

numeric value smaller than the minimum value.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

B–7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix B: Status and Error Messages

Operation invalid while a test is running. You tried to perform an

action that cannot be completed while a test is running. For example,

this message would appear if you attempted to recall instrument

settings while a test is running.

Optical power has been overloaded. You have connected an optical

signal that has saturated the CTS 710 optical receiver.

Pointer burst active, request ignored. You pressed the POINTER

ACTION button while a pointer burst movement was occurring.

Pointer movements disabled while in Through Mode. You pressed the

POINTER ACTION button while the CTS 710 was in Through

Mode. Pointer movements are not allowed while the CTS 710 is in

Through Mode because the transmit signal must match the received

signal.

Root directory is full. You tried to save a file to disk but the directory

shows that the disk is full. Insert a disk with space available and save

the file again.

Through Mode invalid while receiving a tributary signal. You attempted

to change the transmit rate to Through Mode while a test was

running at a tributary rate. Any change in settings would invalidate

the test, so no change was made.

Unexpected End Of File, file not read. You tried to recall an instrument

setup file, a pass/fail file, or a history file and a disk error occurred.

The file is corrupted and cannot be recovered.

Warning: No received signal currently identified. You started a test

while there was no received signal.

Write Failure on Disk. The CTS 710 was unable to write to the disk.

Try saving the file on a different disk.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

B–8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix C: Default Factory Settings

Table C–1 lists the instrument settings after Default Factory Settings

have been recalled.

Table C–1: Default Factory Settings

Parameter

Default Value

Transmit Rate

STS-1

Transmit Clock

Internal

Transmit Level

Cross Connect

STS Under Test

Mapping

Bulk Fill No Mapping (Equipped)

PRBS 2^23–1

Transmit Test Pattern

Transmit Overhead Path Trace

Transmit Overhead External Add

Transmit Error Rate

Transmit Error Type

Transmit Alarm

“ ”

(64 null characters)

None

Section B1 BIP Error

None

Transmit Failure

None

Transmit Pointer/Timing Mode

Transmit Pointer Type

Transmit Pointer Control

Transmit Pointer Value

Transmit Pointer Set with New Data Flag

APS Mode

Pointer Movements

STS

Single

522

Yes

RING

Receive Rate

STS-1

Cross Connect

Receive Level

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

C–1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix C: Default Factory Settings

Table C–1: Default Factory Settings (Cont.)

Parameter

Default Value

Receive STS Under Test

Receive Mapping

No Mapping (Equipped)

Receive Tributary Drop

Receive Test Pattern

Test Duration

Off

PRBS 2^23–1

Continuous

None

Receive Path Overhead External Drop

Beeper

Off

Display Brightness

Printer Type

Medium

TEK DPU-411

Off

Print User & Company

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

C–2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix D: Specifications

Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications

Characteristic

Generator Output

Electrical Output

Data Rates

Description

STS-1: 51.84 Mb/s

STS-3: 155.52 Mb/s

Data Formats

STS-1: AMI, B3ZS

STS-3/STS-3c: CMI

Signal Level at Transmit Output

STS-1 Hi:

STSX-1:

±1.0 Vpk ±10% into 75 W

with 450 feet of cable loss

STS-3 Hi:

STSX-3:

±0.5 Vpk ±10% into 75 W

with 225 feet of cable loss

Pulse Shape at Transmit Output Meets ANSI T1-102, Bellcore GR-NWT-000253

Eye Pattern Masks

Return Loss

Connector

>15 dB

Unbalanced, 75 W BNC

Optical Output

Data Rates

OC-1:

OC-3:

51.84 Mb/s

155.52 Mb/s

OC-12: 622.08 Mb/s

Optical Module Options

Opt. 03, 1310 nm, IR, OC-1/3

Opt. 04, 1310 nm, IR, OC-1/3/12

Opt. 05, 1550 nm, LR, OC-1/3/12

Opt. 06, 1310/1550 nm, OC-1/3/12

Signal Level & Wavelength

–10 dBm, typical 1310 nm (Opt. 03, 04, 06)

0 dBm, typical, 1550 nm (Opt. 05, 06)

Pulse Shape

Wavelength

Meets Bellcore GR-253-CORE Eye Pattern Masks

1308 nm, typical (Opt. 03, 04, 06)

1550 nm, typical (Opt. 05, 06)

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

D–1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix D: Specifications

Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications (Cont.)

Characteristic

Description

Spectral Width

≤ 4 nm, 1310 nm (Opt. 03, 04, 06)

≤ 1 nm, 1550 nm (Opt. 05, 06)

Laser Classification

Connectors

Class 1 laser, complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and

1040.11, complies with IEC 825, Section 9.4

FC-PC Standard: Optical Connector kit with ST,

SC, and DIN 47256 included

Signal Structure

Standards Compliance

Meets the requirements of ANSI T1.105A,

Section 8 and Bellcore GR-NWT-000253

Payload Channel (SPE)

One active STS-1 in STS-3 Selection

(The other 2 channels are unequipped)

One active STS-1 in STS-12

(The other 11 channels are unequipped)

One active STS-3c in STS-12

(The other 3 channels are unequipped)

Unequipped Payload

C2 byte is set to 00

Internal Pattern Generator

Patterns

PRBS: 2 –1, 2 –1, 2 –1, 2 –1;

Bulk Fill in a selected SPE channel

(STS-1 or STS-3c)

All 1s, All 0s, 8-bit programmable word

Errors

Single or Continuous

Section BIP (B1)

Line BIP (B2)

Path BIP (B3), Path FEBE

Payload pattern bit

–3

–10

Error Rate Range

Alarms

1 × 10 to 1 × 10 with 0.1 resolution

Line AIS, Line FERF

Path AIS, Path FERF

Failures

LOS, LOF, LOP

Transmitter Clock

Internal Clock

Depends on error type.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

D–2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix D: Specifications

Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications (Cont.)

Characteristic

Description

Accuracy

±4.6 ppm, for instrument calibrated within 24

months

External Clock Reference

Rate

1.544 MHz ±40 ppm

Input

Balanced, 100 W ±5%, Bantam connector

Recovered Clock

Loop timing

Clock is recovered from received signal

Transmit Line Frequency Offset

Frequency offset rate

Receive Input

Electrical Input

Data Rates

±100 ppm of nominal line rate

STS-1: 51.84 Mb/s ±100 ppm

STS-3: 155.52 Mb/s ±100 ppm

Data Formats

STS-1E: AMI, B3ZS coded

STS-3/STS-3c: CMI

Signal Sensitivity

STS-1 Hi:

STSX-1:

STS-1 Lo:

0.5 Vpk min to 1.2 Vpk max

0.25 Vpk min to 0.6 Vpk max

0.125 Vpk min to 0.35 Vpk max

STS-1 Monitor: 20 dB of flat loss below Xcon

STS-3:

STSX-3:

STS-1 Lo:

0.35 Vpk min to 0.6 Vpk max

0.07 Vpk min to 0.3 Vpk max

STS-3 Monitor: 26 dB of flat loss below Hi

Signal Level Display

Signal Equalization

Readout for: Electrical signal level in mV

STS-1:

Cross-connect equalization for 450 feet of AT&T

728A cable

Low-level equalization for 900 feet of AT&T 728A

cable

STS-3:

Automatic equalization for 0 to 450 feet of cable

loss to ITU-T Rec. G.708 and ANSI TI-102

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

D–3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix D: Specifications

Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications (Cont.)

Characteristic

Return Loss

Connector

Description

>15 dB

Unbalanced, 75 W BNC

Optical Input

Data Rates

OC-1:

OC-3:

51.84 Mb/s (±100 ppm)

155.52 Mb/s (±100 ppm)

OC-12: 622.08 Mb/s (±100 ppm)

Maximum Input Power

Operating Wavelength

–7 dBm:

Opt. 05 and 06 include a 10 dB attenuator

1310 nm and 1550 nm:

1100 nm to 1570 nm operating range

–10

Signal Sensitivity

–28 dBm for BER ≤10

Optical Power Meter Accuracy

2 dBm, Typical:

For input power in a range of –30 dBm to –6 dBm

Connectors

FC-PC standard:

Optical connector kit with ST, SC, and DIN 27256

included

Through Mode

Monitors a selected channel and passes the signal

through unchanged

Transmit and Receive Functional Specifications

Transport Overhead

Access

Set overhead bytes to any value from binary

00000000 to 11111111:

A1, A2, C1, E1, F1, D1–D3, K1, K2, D4–D12, S1,

Z2, M2, E2

View all Transport Overhead bytes

Add/Drop

Insert data from the Overhead Add/Drop connector

into the Section DCC, Line DCC or F1 user byte.

Drops data from the Section DCC, Line DCC, or F1

user byte out to the Overhead Add/Drop connector.

K1 and K2 (APS)

Set the APS Bytes, K1 and K2, to any code defined

in ANSI T1.105A

Selectable by text description for all Span and Ring

messages

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

D–4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix D: Specifications

Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications (Cont.)

Characteristic

Path Overhead

Access

Description

Set Path Overhead bytes to any value from binary

00000000 to 11111111:

C2, F2, Z3, Z4, and Z5

View all Path Overhead bytes

Add/Drop

Insert data from the Overhead Add/Drop connector

into the F2 user byte

Drop data from the F2 user byte out to the

Overhead Add/Drop connector

Path Trace Byte J1

Send user-defined 64-byte sequence, or set to

00000000

View Path Trace J1

Pointer Movement

Single

Single pointer justification (increment or decrement)

Burst

Bursts of two to eight pointer justifications spaced

four frames apart. All adjustments within a given

burst are in the same direction. Subsequent bursts

are in alternating directions

Continuous

Set to Value

Pointer justifications occur continuously at a

predetermined rate in an incrementing, decrement-

ing, or alternating direction.

Rate between movements: 2 ms to 10 s, with a

resolution of 1 ms.

Set to a new location with or without the NDF being

set.

Range is 0 to 1023 (783 – 1023 are illegal

locations).

Pointer Test Sequences

Single pointer adjustment

Alternating pointer adjustment

Time between pointer adjustments: 30 s.

Alternating, single

Alternate, double

Pointer adjustment burst

Time between 3 pointers is 0.5 ms, 0.5 ms

Time between pointer burst: 30 s

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

D–5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix D: Specifications

Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications (Cont.)

Characteristic

Description

Phase transient pointer adjustment

burst

Time between 7 pointers is 0.25 s, 0.25 s, 0.5 s,

0.5 s, 0.5 s, 0.5 s.

Time between pointer burst: 30 s.

Periodic pointer adjustment

– 87–3 pattern

– 87–3 pattern with Cancelled pointer movement

number 87

– 87–3 pattern with Added pointer after the 43rd

pointer

Periodic pointer adjustment

– continuous pattern

– continuous pattern with cancellation of one

pointer

– continuous pattern with added pointer

Pointer Direction

Positive or Negative

Initialization Period

On or Off

Thirty second burst of 1 pointer per second in the

same direction as the selected test

Cool Down Period

On or Off

This will last at least 60 seconds

Measurements

Error Count, Error Rate, and

Errored Seconds for:

B1, B2, B3, Payload, Line-FEBE, Path-FEBE

Alarm and Failure Seconds for

LOS, OOF, LOF, SPE LOP, Line AIS & FERF, Path

AIS & FERF, Loss of Power, Loss of Pattern Sync

STS SPE Pointer Measurements

Seconds:

LOP

Illegal pointers

NDF

Count:

Illegal pointers

Positive justifications

Negative justifications

T1M1.3 Analysis

Section B1

Seconds and ratio

Error Blocks, ES, SES, UAS

Background Block Errors

Line B2 & FEBE

Seconds and % of total time

Error-Count, ES, ES-A, ES-B, SES, UAS, EFS

FEBE-Count, FEBE-ES, FEBE-UAS, FEBE-EFS

Path B3 & FEBE

Seconds and % of total time

Error-Count, ES, ES-A, ES-B, SES, UAS, EFS

FEBE-Count, FEBE-ES, FEBE-UAS, FEBE-EFS

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

D–6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix D: Specifications

Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications (Cont.)

Characteristic

Description

Pattern Bit Seconds

and % of total time

Error-Count, ES, ES-A, ES-B, SES, UAS, EFS

LEDs

Status Indicators

LOS, LOF, LOP, Line AIS, Line FERF, Path AIS,

Path FERF, Errors, Pointer Adjust, Signal Present,

Pattern Lock

Histograms

Error Count,

Bit Error Rate and

Errored Seconds

B1, B2, B3, Line-FEBE, Path-FEBE,

Pattern Bit

Alarms & Failures

On/Off

LOS, OOF, LOF, SPE-LOP,

Line-AIS, Line-FERF,

Path-AIS, Path-FERF,

Pattern Loss, Loss of Power

Pointers

STS Pointer Value, Pointer Justification

Measurement Utilities

Measurement Control

Manual Start/Stop

Timed: 1 s to 99 days with 1 s resolution Continu-

ous

Histogram Display Resolution

Result Logging

1 min, 5 min, 15 min, 1 hour

(displays 72 hours with 1 min resolution)

15 min, 60 min, 4 hrs, 12 hrs

(displays 45 days with 15 min resolution)

All measurements are recorded with start, stop time

and date.

The current and previous results are stored in

memory both totalized and graphical.

Both graphical and totalized results can be stored

on a disk.

Utilities

TroubleScan

Scans all measurement results for key violations

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

D–7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix D: Specifications

Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications (Cont.)

Characteristic

Description

AutoScan

AutoScan to incoming signal (rate, mapping,

framing, and pattern).

Identifies incoming signal and presents graphical

display of SPE and VT structure.

Identifies VT signal status by showing VT number,

equipped vs unequipped, alarms and pattern.

Stored Setups

Pass/Fail Tests

5 front panel setups in memory

200 front panel setups per disk

Predefined Pass/Fail Tests can be created, stored

and executed

Pass/Fail tests are stored on disk

200 Pass/Fail test setups per disk

Add/Drop Interface for

A DB-37 female connector provides the interface to

Data Communication Channels and an external protocol analyzer.

User Channels

Clock and data signals are differential TTL, conform

to RS-422 specifications, and are also compatible

with single-ended TTL signals.

Add/Drop: D1–D3, D4–D12, F1, F2

Connector: 37 Pin DIN (DTE and DCE)

Triggering

Disk Drive

Pulse at start of each frame, (Tx and Rx),

Connector: 37 Pin DIN

3.5 inch, 1.44 MB, DOS compatible

Measurement Result stored in ASCII

Stored Setups and Pass/Fail Tests in IEEE 488.2

format

Printer

Optional printer in pouch (thermal): HC 411

Printer support: Epson, HP Thinkjet

Serial Printer Port: RS-232

Print to disk: BMP format, Interleaf format, and

Encapsulated PostScript

Computer Interface

IEEE-488.2 interface

RS-232-C interface (DB9)

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

D–8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix D: Specifications

Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications (Cont.)

Characteristic

Help Mode

Display

Description

Online task-oriented help

7 inch diagonal CRT, magnetic deflection

Horizontal raster-scan green phosphor

Resolution: 640 by 480 pixels

VGA output: 15 pin connector

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

D–9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix D: Specifications

Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities

Characteristic

DS1/DS3 Generator

Electrical Output

Data Rates

Description

DS1 (1.544 Mb/s)

DS3 (44.736 Mb/s)

Formats

DS1:

DS3:

AMI, B8ZS coded

B3ZS coded

Signal Level

DS1:

DS3:

3 V peak ±0.6 V into 100 W

0.6 V peak ±0.24 V into 75 W

Pulse Shape

Connectors

Meets ANSI T1-102 Pulse Masks

DS1:

DS3:

Bantam 100 W

BNC 75 W

Data Source

DS1:

DS1 Generator

SONET VT1.5 Drop

DS3 Generator

DS3:

SONET SPE Drop

DS1/DS3 Internal Pattern Generator

Framing

DS1:

DS3:

SF(D4)

ESF

Unframed

M13

C-bit Parity

Unframed

Patterns

PRBS: 2 –1, 2 –1, 2 –1; All 1’s, All 0’s, Fixed

Pattern 8 bit, Fixed Pattern 16 bit, Fixed Pattern 24

bit, QRSS (DS1 only), 1 in 8 (DS1 only),

3 in 24 (DS1 only)

Errors

Single or Continuous

DS1:

Frame Bit Error

CRC-6 Error (ESF only)

Pattern Bit Error

DS3:

Frame Bit Error

P Parity Bit Error (M13 framing only)

C Parity Bit Error (C-Bit parity only)

Pattern Bit Error

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

D–10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix D: Specifications

Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities (Cont.)

Characteristic

Description

–2

–8

Error Rate Range

Alarms and Failures

1 × 10 to 1 × 10 with 0.1 resolution

DS1:

Yellow

AIS

DS3:

Yellow

AIS (DS3 blue)

Idle

VT1.5/DS3 Mapping

VT1.5 Map Signal Source

Internal DS1 Generator

Received DS1 signal

VT1.5 Mapping

Floating Asynch

VT1.5 Active Map Channel Selection Allows selection of any one of 28 VT channels

Remaining 27 VT channels are background

VT1.5 Background Channels

Background Channel Content

Background Channel Framing

When internal DS1 generator is used:

QRSS or Idle pattern (11010101)

When external source is used: QRSS

When internal DS1 generator is used: Same as

active channel

When external source is used: Unframed

VT1.5 Errors

(Signal or Continuous)

VT BIP-2

VT FEBE

VT1.5 Alarms and Failures

VT AIS

VT FERF

VT Loss of Pointer

VT Loss of Multiframe

DS3 SPE Add Source

Internal DS3 Generator

Received DS3 signal

Transmitter Clock

Internal Clock

Accuracy

±4.6 ppm, for instrument calibrated within 24

months

Depends on error type.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

D–11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix D: Specifications

Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities (Cont.)

Characteristic

External Clock Reference

Rates

Description

1.544 MHz ±40 ppm

Input

Balanced, 100 W ±5%, DS1 Bantam connector

Recovered Clock

Loop timing

Clock is recovered from received signal

Transmit Line Frequency Offset

Frequency offset rate

±100 ppm of nominal line rate with 0.1 ppm

resolution

External DS1/DS3

Rates

Clock Input (for Jitter Generation)

1.544 Mb/s, 44.736 Mb/s

Input

Unbalanced, 75 W BNC, AC coupled

0.5 volts to 1.5 volts peak to peak

Signal Level

DS1/DS3 Receiver

Electrical Input

Data Rates

DS1: (1.544 MHz) ±150 ppm

DS3: (44.736 MHz) ±150 ppm

Formats

DS1:

DS3:

AMI, B8ZS

B3ZS

Impedance

DS1:

100 W balanced

DS1 Bridged:

DS3:

1 kW balanced

75 W to ground, unbalanced

Signal Level

Connectors

DSX-1:

DS-1 Monitor:

DSX-3:

DS-3 Monitor:

3 Vpk ±0.6 V into 100 W

20 dB flat loss below DSX-1

0.6 Vpk ±0.24 V into 75 W

20 dB flat loss below DSX-3

DS1:

DS3:

Bantam 100 W

BNC 75 W

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

D–12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix D: Specifications

Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities (Cont.)

Characteristic

Description

DS1/DS3 Internal Pattern Receiver

Pattern Receiver Source

DS1:

DS3:

Rx Signal (ext)

VT1.5 Drop

Rx Signal (ext)

SONET SPE Drop

Framing

DS1:

DS3:

SF(D4)

ESF

Unframed

M13

C-bit Parity

Unframed

Demultiplexing

Demux DS3 to DS1

Allows selection of any one of 28 DS1 channels

from a DS3

VT1.5/DS3 Demapping

VT1.5 Demapping

Floating Async

VT1.5 Active Demap Channel

Selection

Allows selection of any one of 28 VT channels

Drop VT1.5 to

Internal DS1 Receiver

External DS1 signal output

Drop DS3 from

Drop DS3 to

Selected STS-1 Channel

Internal DS3 Receiver

External DS3 signal output

VT Path Overhead

VT1.5 Path Overhead Access

V5 control (–––xxxx–)

Set VT Path Overhead bytes to any value from

binary 00000000 to 11111111:

Z3, Z4, and Z5

View all Path Overhead bytes

VT1.5 Path Trace Byte J2

Send user-defined 16-byte sequence, or set to

00000000

View Path Trace J2

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

D–13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix D: Specifications

Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities (Cont.)

Characteristic

Description

VT Pointer Movement

VT1.5 Pointer Interaction

Single

VT1.5 or STS, but not both at the same time

Single pointer justification

(increment or decrement)

Burst

Bursts of two to eight pointer justifications spaced

four multi-frames apart. All adjustments within a

given burst are in the same direction. Subsequent

bursts are in alternating directions

Continuous

Pointer justifications occur continuously at a

predetermined rate in an incrementing, decrement-

ing, or alternating direction.

Rate between movements: 48 ms to 1 s, with a

resolution of 1 ms

Set to Value

Set to a new location with or without the NDF being

set.

Range is from 0 to 1023 (104 – 1023 are illegal

locations).

VT Pointer Test Sequences

Single pointer adjustment

Alternating pointer adjustment

Time between pointer adjustments: 30 s

Single

Double

Pointer adjustment burst

Time between 3 pointers is 2 ms, 2 ms

Time between pointer burst: 30 s

Phase transient pointer adjust-

ment burst

Time between 7 pointers is 0.25 s, 0.25 s, 0.5 s,

0.5 s, 0.5 s, 0.5 s

Time between pointer burst: 30 s

Periodic pointer adjustment test

sequence – 26–1 pattern

– 26–1 pattern

– 26–1 pattern with Cancelled pointer movement

number 26

– 26–1 pattern with Added pointer after the 13th

pointer

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

D–14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix D: Specifications

Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities (Cont.)

Characteristic

Description

Periodic pointer adjustment

– continuous pattern

– continuous pattern with cancellation of one

pointer

– continuous pattern with added pointer

Pointer Direction

Positive or Negative

Initialization Period

On or Off

Thirty second burst of 1 pointer per second in the

same direction as the selected test.

Cool Down Period

On or Off

This will last at least 60 seconds.

Measurements

DS1 Error Count, Error Rate and

Error seconds for

Frame Bit

CRC-6 (ESF only)

Pattern Bit

DS3 Error Count, Error Rate and

Error seconds for

Frame Bit

P Parity Bit (M13 framing only)

C Parity Bit (C-Bit parity only)

Pattern Bit

VT1.5 Error Count, Error Rate and

Error seconds for

VT BIP-2

VT FEBE

DS1 Alarm and Failure Seconds for AIS

Yellow

Loss of Pattern Sync

Loss of Frame

Loss of Signal

DS3 Alarm and Failure Seconds for AIS (DS3 Blue)

Yellow (DS3 FERF)

Idle

Loss of Pattern Sync

Loss of Frame

Loss of Signal

VT1.5 Alarm and Failure Seconds for VT AIS

VT FERF

VT Loss of Pointer

VT Loss of Multiframe

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

D–15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix D: Specifications

Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities (Cont.)

Characteristic

Description

VT1.5 Pointer Measurements

Seconds:

LOP

Illegal pointers

NDF

Count:

Illegal pointers

Positive justifications

Negative justifications

T1M1.3 Analysis

VT1.5 BIP-2 & FEBE Seconds and

% of total time

Error-Count, ES, ES-A, ES-B, SES UAS, EFS,

FEBE-Count, FEBE-ES, FEBE-UAS, FEBE-EFS

DS1 Frame Error (SF) &

CRC-6 Error (ESF), Seconds and %

of total time

Error-Count, ES, ES-A, ES-B, SES, UAS, EFS

Error-Count, ES, ES-A, ES-B, SES,UAS, EFS

DS3 P-Bit Error (M13) &

C-Parity Error (C-Bit Parity),

Seconds and % of total time

DS1/DS3 Payload (Pattern Bit

Errors), Seconds and % of total time

LEDs

Status Indicators

VT AIS

VT FERF

DS1/DS3 AIS

DS1/DS3 YELLOW

VT BIP-2 ERROR DS1/DS3 ERROR

Histograms for DS1, DS3 and VT1.5

DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Error Count, Bit CRC, Frame, Parity,

Error Rate and Errored Seconds VT-BIT2, VT-FEBE,

Pattern Bit

DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Alarms & Fail-

ures On/Off

LOS, LOF, AIS, Yellow (FERF),

VT-LOP, VT-AIS, VT-FERF, VT-LOM,

Pattern Loss, Loss of Power

VT1.5 Pointers

VT Pointer Value, Pointer Justification

Measurement Utilities

Measurement Control

Manual Start/Stop

Timed: 1 s to 99 days with 1 s resolution

Continuous

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

D–16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix D: Specifications

Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities (Cont.)

Characteristic

Description

Histogram Display Resolution

1 min, 5 min, 15 min, 1 hour

(displays 72 hours with 1 min resolution)

15 min, 60 min, 4 hrs, 12 hrs

(displays 45 days with 15 min resolution)

Result Logging

All measurements are recorded with start, stop time

and date.

The current and previous results are stored in

memory both totalized and graphical.

Both graphical and totalized results can be stored

on a disk.

Table D–3: Environmental Specifications

Characteristic

Environmental

Temperature

Description

Operating: 0_ C to +50_ C

Nonoperating: –40_ C to +75_ C

Altitude

Operating: 4,572 m (15,000 ft)

Nonoperating: 12,192 m (40,000 ft)

Humidity

Operating:

To 95%, relative humidity at or below +45_ C for

2 hours or less

To 90% relative humidity at or below 30_ C,

continuous

Transportation Handling

Qualifies under National Safe Transit Association

1s Pre-shipment Test; 1A-B-1.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

D–17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix D: Specifications

Table D–4: Physical Characteristics

Characteristic

Description

Dimensions

Height: 165 mm (6.5 in)

191 mm (7.5 in) with accessory pouch

Width: 362 mm (14.25 in)

Depth: 490 mm (19.25 in) with front cover

564 mm (22.2 in) with handle extended

Weight

Net: Approximately 8.7 kg (19.3 lb)

Shipping: Approximately 14.1 kg (31 lb)

Power Requirements

Line Voltage Range: 90 to 250 V

Line Frequency: 48 to 62 Hz.

RMS

Power Consumption: 240 Watts max.

Table D–5: Certifications and compliances

Characteristic

Description

EC Declaration of Conformity – EMC Meets intent of Directive 89/336/EEC for

Electromagnetic Compatibility. Compliance was

demonstrated to the following specifications as

listed in the Official Journal of the European

Communities:

EN 55011

Class A Radiated and

Conducted Emissions

EN 50082-1 Immunity:

IEC 801-2

IEC 801-3

IEC 801-4

IEC 801-5

Electrostatic Discharge

Immunity

RF Electromagnetic Field

Immunity

Electrical Fast Transient/Burst

Immunity

Power Line Surge Immunity

FCC Compliance

Emissions comply with FCC Code of Federal

Regulations 47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A Limits

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

D–18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix D: Specifications

Table D–5: Certifications and compliances (cont.)

Characteristic

Description

EC Declaration of Conformity – Low Compliance was demonstrated to the following

Voltage

specification as listed in the Official Journal of the

European Communities:

Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC

EN 61010-1/A1

Safety requirements for

electrical equipment for

measurement, control,

and laboratory use

Approvals

UL1244 – Electrical and Electronic Measuring and

Testing Equipment

CAN/CSA-22.2 No. 231 – CSA Safety

requirements for Electrical and Electronic

Measuring and testing Equipment

Conditions for Safety Certification

Operating temperature:

Max. Operating altitude:

Equipment Type:

+5 to +40 °C

2000 m

Test and measuring

Safety Class:

Class I, grounded

product (IEC1010-1)

Overvoltage Category:

Polution Degree:

CAT II (IEC1010-1)

Polution Degree 2,

rated for indoor use

only (IEC1010-1)

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

D–19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix D: Specifications

Table D–5: Certifications and compliances (cont.)

Characteristic

Description

Installation Category Descriptions

Terminals on this product may have different

installation category designations. The installation

categories are:

CAT III Distribution-level mains (usually

permanently connected). Equipment at

this level is typically in a fixed industrial

location

CAT II

Local-level mains (wall sockets).

Equipment at this level includes

appliances, portable tools, and similar

products. Equipment is usually

cord-connected

CAT I

Secondary (signal level) or battery

operated circuits of electronic equipment

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

D–20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test

The purpose of the incoming inspection test is to verify that the

CTS 710 SONET Test Set is functioning properly. The incoming

inspection test relies on the front panel status lights to indicate the

results of the test. Figure E–1 shows the location of the status lights

used in these procedures.

Yellow history lights

indicate an event has

occurred

Green lights

indicate the

condition is true

CLEAR HISTORY

button clears

history of events

Red lights indicate an

event is occurring now

Figure E–1: Front-Panel Status Lights

Table E–1 details the equipment required to complete the incoming

inspection test.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

E–1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test

Table E–1: Required Equipment

Minimum

Requirements

Item Number and Description

Example

Purpose

Optical Fiber Cable

FC/PC to

Interconnect

62.5/125 mm

FC/PC, Tektro- optical signals

nix part number

174-2322-00

multimode fiber;

FC/PC connector

on one end;

compatible with

CTS 710 connec-

tor option on

other end

Tektronix part

number

012-1338-00

Interconnect

electrical sig-

nals

75 W Coaxial Cable

75 W impedance;

≈1 m length,

BNC connectors

Tektronix part

number

012-1314-00

Interconnect

electrical

signals

110 W Bantam Cable

110 W imped-

ance; ≈6 ft

length, bantam

connectors

This equipment is required to test a CTS 710 with any one of the optional

Optical/Electrical Plug-in Interface Modules installed; otherwise, it is not

required.

Loop-Back Connection

The incoming inspection test requires an external loop-back

connection from the TRANSMIT/OUT output to the RECEIVE/IN

input. For the SONET rate electrical loop-back, you can use the 75 W

BNC coaxial cable provided as a standard accessory to the CTS 710.

If the Add/Drop/Test Option is installed, you can use the 75 W

coaxial cable for checking DS3 operation, and will need to use a

bantam cable (a standard accessory with the Add/Drop/Test Option)

to check DS1 operation. If one of the Electrical/Optical Plug-in

Interface Modules is installed in your CTS 710, you also need a short

optical cable that is compatible with the optical connectors on your

instrument. Optical cables are not included as standard accessories to

the CTS 710.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

E–2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test

How to Proceed

If the CTS 710 fails any of these tests, it has failed the incoming

inspection test. Double check the electrical and optical connections

and repeat any failed test. If the failure persists, contact your local

Tektronix field office or representative for assistance.

You can perform the following tests in any order. Each test is

independent and does not depend on the setup from the previous test.

H Turn on the CTS 710. Allow it to warm up for 20 minutes before

proceeding with the tests.

System Self Test with External Loop-Back

This test executes the Self Test including coverage of the transmitter

and receiver I/O circuitry.

Equipment

Required

75 W BNC coaxial cable for electrical loop-back

Optical loop-back cable if Electrical/Optical Plug-in

Interface Module is installed

Prerequisites

Time Required

CTS 710 warmed-up at least twenty minutes

Approximately two minutes

1. Attach electrical and optical loop-back cables from the

TRANSMIT/OUT outputs to the RECEIVE/IN inputs.

NOTE. Connectors labeled OUT and IN are present only on

instruments equipped with the Add/Drop/Test Option.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

E–3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test

2. Set up and execute the system self test with the following

sequence:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

UTILITY

SELF TEST

Self Test Group

Sys: Ext

Self Test Control Run

SONET Signals

This test checks that the CTS 710 transmits and receives error-free

signals at all SONET rates.

Equipment

Required

75 W BNC coaxial cable for electrical loop-back

Optical loop-back cable if Electrical/Optical Plug-in

Interface Module is installed

CTS 710 warmed up at least twenty minutes

Approximately five minutes

Prerequisites

Time Required

1. Attach electrical and optical loop-back cables from the

TRANSMIT outputs to the RECEIVE inputs.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

E–4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test

2. Perform the initial setup of the CTS 710 with the following

sequence:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

RECALL

INSTRUMENT

SETUPS

DEFAULT

FACTORY

SETTINGS

Recall Setup

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Tx/Rx Settings

Coupled

POINTERS &

TIMING

Pointer Control

Set Value

Pointer Value set Default 522

3. To check the STS-1 rate, press the CLEAR HISTORY button,

wait two seconds, and then verify that no yellow history lights are

on.

4. To check the STS-3 rate, set the transmit rate as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Transmit Rate

STS-3

NOTE. When changing the transmit rate, the LOP, LOS, and LOF

history lights may turn on; this is normal. However, the red event

lights should not stay on.

5. Press the CLEAR HISTORY button, wait two seconds, and then

verify that no yellow history lights are on.

6. Steps 7 through 10 of this procedure apply only if one of the

Electrical/Optical Plug-in Interface Modules (Option 03 or

Option 04) is installed in your CTS 710.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

E–5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test

7. To check the OC-3 rate, perform the setup sequence:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Transmit Rate

OC-3

8. Press the CLEAR HISTORY button, wait two seconds, and then

verify that no yellow history lights are on.

9. If your CTS 710 does not have OC-12 capability, you have

completed the incoming inspection test. To check the OC-12 rate,

perform the setup sequence:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Transmit Rate

OC-12

10. Press the CLEAR HISTORY button, wait two seconds, and then

verify that no yellow history lights are on.

Tributary Signals (Add/Drop/Test Option Only)

This test checks that the CTS 710 transmits and receives error-free

signals at all tributary rates.

Equipment

Required

75 W BNC coaxial cable for DS3 electrical loop-back

110 W Bantam Cable for DS1 electrical loop-back

CTS 710 warmed up at least twenty minutes

Prerequisites

Time Required

Approximately five minutes

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

E–6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test

1. Attach electrical and optical loop-back cables from the OUT

outputs to the IN inputs.

2. Perform the initial setup of the CTS 710 with the following

sequence:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TEST SETUPS

RECALL

INSTRUMENT

SETUPS

DEFAULT

FACTORY

SETTINGS

Recall Setup

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Tx/Rx Settings

Coupled

DS1

Transmit Rate

3. To check the DS1 rate, press the CLEAR HISTORY button, wait

two seconds, and then verify that no yellow history lights are on.

4. To check the DS3 rate, set the transmit rate as follows:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Transmit Rate

DS3

NOTE. When changing the transmit rate, the LOP, LOS, and LOF

history lights may turn on; this is normal. However, the red error

lights should not stay on.

5. Press the CLEAR HISTORY button, wait two seconds, and then

verify that no yellow history lights are on.

This completes the incoming inspection test.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

E–7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

E–8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix F: Example Disk Contents

This manual ships with a disk containing files that you can load into

your CTS 710. The files are examples of instrument setups, test

results and pass/fail tests. The files contained on the disk are

described in the following paragraphs.

Instrument Setups

The STRESS file is an instrument setup file. The file sets up the

CTS 710 to generate an STS-1 signal that contains alarms, errors and

pointer movements. The STRESS file is an example of how the

CTS 710 can save you time by storing instrument setups on disk for

later recall.

Test Results

The ONEDAY file is a test results file. It contains one day (24 hours)

of test results. Recall the file from the RECALL RESULTS page of

the RESULTS menu. You can view the test results on the MAIN

RESULTS and ERROR ANALYSIS pages of the RESULTS menu.

You can view a graph of the test results on the HISTORY GRAPHS

page of the RESULTS menu. The HISTORY GRAPHS page shows

when alarms, errors and pointer movements occurred.

Pass/Fail Tests

The DEMO_10S file is a pass/fail test that runs for just 10 seconds.

To make the test fail, press the INSERT ERROR button on the front

panel. To run the test, connect an electrical cable between the

TRANSMIT and RECEIVE connectors on the front panel and then

recall the test from the RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS page of the

TEST SETUPS menu. You can see how the test was set up by

viewing the test parameters on the SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS page of

the TEST SETUPS menu after you recall the test.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

F–1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix F: Example Disk Contents

The BER_STS1 file is a 15-minute BER test. The test passes if the

BER is better than 10E–7. To run the test, connect an electrical cable

between the TRANSMIT and RECEIVE connectors on the front

panel and then recall the test from the RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS

page of the TEST SETUPS menu. You can see how the test was set

up by viewing the test parameters on the SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS

page of the TEST SETUPS menu after you recall the test.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

F–2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors

This appendix describes the connectors located on the rear panel of

the CTS 710.

VGA

Video

Output

External

Clock Input

(Optional)

GPIB RS-232

Port Port

Power

Connector

Ground

Calibration Overhead 1.544 Mb/s (Connector

Fuse

Principal

Power

Switch

Signal

Output

Add/Drop

Port

BITS

Timing

Not Used)

Reference

Input

Figure G–1: CTS 710 Rear Panel Connectors

VGA Video Output

The CTS 710 can drive an external IBM-compatible VGA monitor.

There are no parameters to set in order to drive an external monitor.

The output is monochrome (green only); the resolution is 640 pixels

× 480 pixels. Figure G–2 shows how the pins are numbered on the

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

G–1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors

VGA connector. Table G–1 lists the pin assignment for the rear-panel

VGA connector.

Figure G–2: The VGA Video Output Connector

Table G–1: VGA Video Output Connector Pin Assignment

Pin Number

Description

Ground

Video Signal (Green)

Ground

–

Ground

–

Ground

–

Horizontal Sync

Vertical Sync

–

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

G–2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors

GPIB Port

The GPIB (General Purpose Interface Bus) port is used for remote

control of the CTS 710. For detailed information on remote control

of the CTS 710, see the CTS 710 SONET Test Set Programmer

Manual (Tektronix part number 070-8924-XX)

RS-232 Port

The rear panel RS-232 connector is used to connect to printers and

instrument controllers. Set the RS-232 parameters for printers on the

PRINTER SETUP page of the UTILITY menu. Set the RS-232

parameters for instrument controllers on the REMOTE CONTROL

page of the UTILITY menu. You can find more detailed information

on remote control of the CTS 710 in the CTS 710 SONET Test Set

Programmer Manual. Figure G–3 shows how the pins are numbered

on the RS-232 port. Table G–2 lists the pin assignment for the

RS-232 port on the CTS 710 rear panel.

Figure G–3: The RS-232 Port

Table G–2: RS-232 Rear Panel Connector Pin Assignment

Pin Number

Name

Description

DCD

Data Carrier Detect

RxD

TxD

DTR

GND

Receive Data

Transmit Data

Data Terminal Ready

Signal Ground

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

G–3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors

Table G–2: RS-232 Rear Panel Connector Pin Assignment (Cont.)

Pin Number

Name

Description

DSR

Data Set Ready

RTS

CTS

Request To Send

Clear To Send

Ring Indicator

External Clock Input

You use the external clock input to provide an external reference for

the transmit clock. To set the transmit clock to an external clock:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Transmit Clock

External BITS

External DSn

H Select External to use an external BITS reference clock for

SONET or DSn signals.

H Select External DSn to use an external clock for DS1/DS3

signals. This selection enables you to input a jittered clock to

provide DSn line jitter.

Calibration Signal Output

You use the calibration signal output for servicing the CTS 710.

Information on servicing the CTS 710 is located in the CTS 710

SONET Test Set & CTS 750 SDH Test Set Service Manual, Tektronix

part number 070-8853-XX.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

G–4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors

Overhead Add/Drop Port

You use the Overhead Add/Drop port to add/drop the section and line

data communication channels (DCC), and the section and line user

channels. The DCC and user channel add/drop functions are

independent; for example, you can add a DCC while dropping a user

channel. Only one DCC or user channel can be added or dropped at a

time. The parameters for adding a DCC or a user channel are located

on the TRANSPORT OVERHEAD and PATH OVERHEAD pages of

the TRANSMIT menu. The parameters for dropping a DCC or a user

channel are located on the TRANSPORT OVERHEAD and PATH

OVERHEAD pages of the RECEIVE menu.

The Overhead Add/Drop port uses a gapped clock. Figure G–4 shows

how the pins are numbered on the Overhead Add/Drop port.

Tables G–3 and G–4 summarize the different communication

channels.

Figure G–4: The Overhead Add/Drop Port

Table G–3: Overhead Channels Added

Added Channel

Bytes Added

Data Rate

Clock Rate

Section DCC

D1, D2, D3

192 kbps

216 kHz

Line DCC

D4, D5, D6, D7, D8,

D9, D10, D11, D12

576 kbps

64 kbps

2.16 MHz

Section User

Channel

72 kHz

Path User Channel

The Line DCC signal has a 1/3–2/3 duty ratio.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

G–5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors

Table G–4: Overhead Channels Dropped

Dropped Channel Bytes Dropped

Data Rate

Clock Rate

Section DCC

Line DCC

D1, D2, D3

192 kbps

216 kHz

D4, D5, D6, D7, D8,

D9, D10, D11, D12

576 kbps

64 kbps

2.16 MHz

Section User

Channel

72 kHz

Path User Channel

72 kHz

Table G–5 summarizes the data signal pin assignments on the

Overhead Add/Drop port. Table G–6 summarizes the additional pin

assignments on the Overhead Add/Drop port. The signal lines listed

in Table G–5 can drive 100 W, differential TTL lines. The signal

lines are terminated with a 100 W impedance and can drive 100 W

lines.

Table G–5: Overhead Add/Drop Port Data Signal Pin

Assignments

Signal

+Pin

–Pin

Added Tx Data (input)

Added Tx Clock (output)

Tx Common (ground)

–

Dropped Rx Data (output)

Dropped Rx Clock (output)

Rx Common (ground)

–

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

G–6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors

Table G–6: Overhead Add/Drop Port Additional Pin

Assignments

Signal

Shield (ground)

Signal Ground (ground)

Reserved

Tx Frame Pulse (output)

Rx Frame Pulse (output)

The Frame Pulse signals are nominal 8 kHz, TTL, single-ended signals.

BITS Timing Reference Input

Use the BITS (Building Integrated Timing Supply) timing reference

input connector to connect to a BITS reference. To synchronize the

CTS 710 transmit clock with a BITS reference:

Press Menu

Button

Select Menu

Page

Highlight

Parameter

Select Choice

TRANSMIT

SETTINGS

Transmit Clock

BITS

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

G–7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

G–8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix H: Changing Optical Port

Connectors

The following procedures are discussed in this appendix:

H Cleaning the Optical Ports

H Changing the Optical Port Connectors

Cleaning the Optical Ports

If the CTS 710 performance appears degraded, the optical fiber and

optical port may be dirty. Clean the fiber connector with a clean

cloth.

To clean an optical port:

1. Verify that the CTS 710 has been turned off with the principal

power switch on the rear panel.

2. Remove the four screws that attach the bulkhead connector to the

front panel (see Figure H–1).

3. Gently pull the bulkhead out of the unit and unscrew the fiber

connector. Be careful not to pull beyond the fiber slack.

4. Using a soft, lint-free cloth with a high-quality glass cleaner,

clean the tip of the fiber cable.

5. If available, use low-pressure compressed air or canned air to

blow any dirt out of the bulkhead connector. If compressed air is

not available, then the bulkhead will have to be taken apart and

cleaned. Refer to the Changing the Optical Port Connectors

procedure, on page H–2, for information about bulkhead

disassembly.

6. After cleaning the bulkhead, reconnect the fiber and install the

bulkhead. Be sure to reinstall the dustcap chain.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

H–1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix H: Changing Optical Port Connectors

NOTE. To keep cleaning to a minimum, install the dustcap when no

fiber is connected to the optical port.

Optical

Fiber

Connector

Figure H–1: Removing the Optical Bulkhead Connector

Changing the Optical Port Connectors

The CTS 710 is shipped with the FC connector bulkhead and dustcap

installed. If you wish to change to the ST, DIN 47256, or SC

connectors perform the following procedure:

1. Verify that the CTS 710 has been turned off with the principal

power switch on the rear panel.

2. Remove the four screws that attach the bulkhead connector to the

front panel (see Figure H–1).

3. Gently pull the bulkhead out of the unit and unscrew the fiber

connector. Be careful not to pull beyond the fiber slack.

4. Disassemble the bulkhead as shown in Figures H–2 through H–5.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

H–2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix H: Changing Optical Port Connectors

Figure H–2: FC Optical Bulkhead Assembly

Figure H–3: ST Optical Bulkhead Assembly

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

H–3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix H: Changing Optical Port Connectors

Figure H–4: DIN 47256 Optical Bulkhead Assembly

Figure H–5: SC Optical Bulkhead Assembly

5. Replace the current bulkhead with the one you wish to use and

reassemble.

6. Installation is the reverse of steps 1 through 3.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

H–4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix I: Packing for Shipment

If you ship the CTS 710, pack it in the original shipping carton and

packing material. If the original packing material is not available,

package the instrument as follows:

1. Obtain a corrugated cardboard shipping carton with inside

dimensions at least 15 cm (6 in) taller, wider, and deeper than the

CTS 710. The shipping carton must be constructed of cardboard

with 170 kg (375 lb) test strength.

2. If you are shipping the CTS 710 to a Tektronix field office for

repair, attach a tag to the CTS 710 showing the instrument owner

and address, the name of the person to contact about the

instrument, the instrument type, and the serial number.

3. Wrap the CTS 710 with polyethylene sheeting or equivalent

material to protect the finish.

4. Cushion the CTS 710 in the shipping carton by tightly packing

dunnage or urethane foam on all sides between the carton and the

CTS 710. Allow 7.5 cm (3 in) on all sides, top, and bottom.

5. Seal the shipping carton with shipping tape or an industrial

stapler.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

I–1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix I: Packing for Shipment

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

I–2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Glossary and Index

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Glossary

AIS

An acronym for Alarm Indication Signal. An AIS is used to alert

downstream equipment that an upstream failure has been

detected.

APS

An acronym for Automatic Protection Switching.

ASCII

An acronym for American Standard Code for Information

Interchange.

BER

An acronym for Bit Error Ratio (or Rate). The principal measure

of quality of a digital transmission system. BER is defined as:

Number of Errors

BER +

Total Number of Bits

BER is usually expressed as a negative exponent. For example,

–7

a BER of 10 means that 1 bit out of 10 bits is in error.

BIP

An acronym for Bit Interleaved Parity. A method used to

monitor errors in the transmitted signal.

Bit Error

An incorrect bit. Also known as a coding violation.

BITS

An acronym for Building Integrated Timing Supply.

COFA

An acronym for Change of Frame Alignment.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.}Glossary–1

Glossary

An acronym for Coding Violation.

The symbol for decibels.

dBm

The symbol for power level in decibels relative to 1 mW.

An acronym for Degraded Minute. A minute with a BER greater

–6

than 10 .

DSn

An acronym for Digital Signal-n (DS1, DS2, DS3, and DS4).

DS1 is the basic multiplex rate in North America; additional

rates are DS2, DS3, and DS4. The following table lists the DSn

rates and their multiple of DS1:

Digital Signal Transmission Rates

Level

Rate

Multiple of DS1

DS1

1.544 Mb/s

DS1c

DS2

DS3

3.152 Mb/s

6.312 Mb/s

44.736 Mb/s

EFS

An acronym for Error Free Seconds.

An acronym for Errored Second. A second with at least one

error.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Glossary–2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Glossary

FEBE

An acronym for Far End Block Error. An indication returned to

the transmitting LTE that an errored block has been detected at

the receiving LTE.

FERF

An acronym for Far End Receive Failure. A FERF indicates to

the transmitting LTE that the receiving LTE has detected an

incoming line failure or is receiving a Line AIS.

ITU

An acronym for the International Telecommunication Union.

Line

The portion of a transmission line between two multiplexers.

Line Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)

A Line AIS is generated by Section Terminating Equipment

upon Loss of Signal or Loss of Frame.

Line Coding Violation (CV)

The sum of the BIP errors detected at the Line layer. Line CVs

are collected using the BIP codes in the B2 bytes of the Line

Overhead.

Line Errored Second (ES)

A second during which at least one Line CV occurred, or a

second during which the line was in the Line AIS state.

Line Far End Receive Failure (FERF)

An indication returned to a transmitting LTE from the receiving

LTE that a Line AIS or incoming line failure has been detected.

Line Overhead (LOH)

Controls the payload information using the section layer and

provides alarm indications, error monitoring, and message

signalling between two LTEs.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.}Glossary–3

Glossary

Line Severely Errored Second (SES)

A second with N or more Line CVs, or a second during which

the line was in the Line AIS state. The value of N varies with

–7

the transmit rate, but corresponds to a 2 × 10 BER.

LOF

An acronym for Loss of Frame.

LOP

An acronym for Loss of Pointer.

LOS

An acronym for Loss of Signal.

LTE

An acronym for Line Terminating Equipment.

Mapping

The process of placing a tributary signal into a SONET SPE.

Mb/s

Megabits per second.

An acronym for Network Element.

An acronym for Optical Carrier.

OOF

An acronym for Out of Frame.

Optical Carrier Level N (OC-N)

An optical version of an STS-N signal.

Path

The portion of a transmission network between two terminal

multiplexers.

Path Overhead (POH)

A set of bytes allocated within the information payload to carry

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Glossary–4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Glossary

status and maintenance information between two network

elements.

POH

An acronym for Path Overhead.

PTE

An acronym for Path Terminating Equipment.

An abbreviation for Receive.

Section

The portion of a transmission line between a Network Element

(NE) and a Line Terminating Equipment (LTE) or two LTEs.

Section Coding Violation (CV)

A BIP error that is detected at the Section layer. CVs for the

Section layer are collected using the BIP-8 in the B1 byte

located in the Section overhead of STS-1 number 1.

Section Errored Second (ES)

A second during which at least one Section CV or OOF/COFA

event occurred, or a second during which the NE was (at any

point during the second) in the LOS state.

Section Overhead (SOH)

A set of bytes allocated within each frame to carry framing and

error monitoring information between an NE and LTE or

between two LTEs. Part of the transport overhead.

SES

An acronym for Severely Errored Seconds.

Severely Errored Seconds (SES)

A second with more than N CVs. N varies with the transmit rate

–7

but corresponds to a BER of 2 × 10 .

SOH

An acronym for Section Overhead.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.}Glossary–5

Glossary

SONET

An acronym for Synchronous Optical NETwork.

SPE

An acronym for Synchronous Payload Envelope.

STE

An acronym for Section Terminating Equipment.

STS

An acronym for Synchronous Transport Signal.

STS-N

An acronym for Synchronous Transport Signal level-N (STS-1,

-3, -9, -12, -18, -24, -36, -48). The different STS-N rates (and

their optical equivalents) for the SONET Signal Hierarchy are

listed in the following table:

SONET Signal Hierarchy

Electrical Signal

Optical Signal

Data Rate (Mb/s)

51.84

STS-1

OC-1

STS-3

OC-3

155.52

STS-9

OC-9

466.56

STS-12

STS-18

STS-24

STS-36

STS-48

OC-12

OC-18

OC-24

OC-36

OC-48

622.08

933.12

1244.16

1866.24

2488.32

An acronym for Terminal Equipment.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Glossary–6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Glossary

Through Mode

The ability to retransmit the incoming signal and manipulate its

contents.

TOH

An acronym for Transport Overhead.

Transport Overhead (TOH)

A set of bytes allocated within each frame to carry operation,

administration, and maintenance information from one end of

the system to the other.

Tributary

The lower rate signal that is input to a multiplexer for

combination (multiplexing) with other low rate signals to form a

higher rate signal.

An abbreviation for Transmit.

An acronym for Virtual Tributary. A structure (not a signal)

designed for transport and switching of sub-STS payloads. The

sizes of VT currently in use are VT1.5, VT2, VT3, and VT6.

Yellow Signal

A code sent upstream to indicate that a failure condition has

been declared downstream.

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.}Glossary–7

Glossary

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Glossary–8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Baud Rate

Abort

PRINTER SETUP, 3–205

REMOTE CONTROL, 3–209

Beeper, MISC SETTINGS, 3–61,

3–201

PRINT CONTROL dialog box,

3–197, 3–198

Self Test Control, 3–211

accessories

optional, 1–2

BITS, Transmit Clock, 3–69

BITS rear-panel connector, G–7

BR, APS COMMANDS, 3–170

BR&SW, APS COMMANDS,

3–170

standard, 1–2

accessory pouch, installing, 1–3

Added Tx Clock, Overhead Add/

Drop Port, G–6

Bridge, Receive Level, 3–124

bright text, 2–16

Added Tx Data, Overhead Add/

Drop Port, G–6

Burst, 3–153, 3–155

Pointer Control, 3–143

Burst Size, POINTERS & TIM-

ING, 3–143

buttons

AUTOSCAN, 3–55

CLEAR HISTORY, 2–5, 3–60

HELP, 2–12

INSERT ERROR, 3–133

menu, 2–11

ON/STBY, 1–9, 1–10

POINTER ACTION, 3–142

principal power switch, 1–9

PRINT, 3–197

adding a tributary signal, 3–72

adjusting pointers, 3–141

AIS, APS COMMANDS, 3–170

Alarm, Fail If condition, 3–39

alarm, audible. See beeper

Alarms, MAIN RESULTS, 3–175,

3–177

Alternate, Pointer Direction, 3–148

AMI, Transmit Line Code, 3–94

Analyze VT, AUTOSCAN dialog

box, 3–57

APS Mode, APS COMMANDS,

3–161

START/STOP, 3–27, 3–49

APS response, checking, 3–161

Architecture, APS COMMANDS,

3–169

AUTOSCAN button, 3–55

Change Bottom, HISTORY

GRAPHS, 3–191

Change Top, HISTORY GRAPHS,

3–190

B3ZS, Transmit Line Code, 3–94

B8ZS, Transmit Line Code, 3–94

changing. See editing

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Index–1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Channel Requesting, APS COM-

MANDS, 3–165, 3–167

checking

Coupled, Tx/Rx Settings

RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–102,

3–123

APS response, 3–161

continuity, 3–2

TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–66,

3–91

coupling settings, 3–65, 3–101

Current Date, MISC SETTINGS,

3–202

Current Time, MISC SETTINGS,

3–202

error and alarm response, 3–8

fault tolerance, 3–8

line frequency offset response,

3–16

mapping and demapping, 3–6

pointer movements, 3–13

signal quality, 3–4

D1–D3

Clear

Description

SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS,

3–45

SAVE RESULTS, 3–193

Name

External Add, 3–85

External Drop, 3–118

D4–D12

External Add, 3–85

External Drop, 3–118

Data Carrier, REMOTE CON-

TROL, 3–209

Data Communication Channel,

3–84, 3–117

date, setting, 3–202

Day, Test Duration, 3–25

DCC, G–5

adding, 3–84

dropping, 3–117

Dec, GPIB Primary Address,

REMOTE CONTROL, 3–207

Decrement, Pointer Direction,

3–148

SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS,

3–45

SAVE RESULTS, 3–192

Operator End Prompt, 3–48

Operator Start Prompt, 3–46

CLEAR HISTORY button, 2–5,

3–60

Company Name, PRINTER SET-

UP, 3–206

connecting signals, 2–13

connectors

front panel, 2–3

rear panel, 2–4

Continuous, Test Duration, 3–23

controls, front panel, 2–2

Cool Down Period, 3–152

Cool Down Time, POINTERS &

TIMING, 3–159

Default

Operator End Prompt, 3–48

Operator Start Prompt, 3–46

cooling requirements, 1–7

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Index–2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Default (XXXXXXXX), TRANS-

PORT OVERHEAD, 3–79

Default 0ppm, Frequency Offset,

3–150

Default 4, GPIB Primary Address,

REMOTE CONTROL, 3–207

Default 50ms, Pointer Rate, 3–147

Default 522, Pointer Value Set to,

3–145

Disk

RECALL INSTRUMENT SET-

UPS, 3–34

RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS,

3–52

RECALL RESULTS, 3–194,

3–195

SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS, 3–50

disk drive, 2–23

Default 78, Pointer Value Set to,

3–146

default settings, C–1

Default Trace, J1 byte, 3–83

Delete, Edit Mode, 2–22

Delete File

disk file names, reading, 2–24

Display Brightness, MISC SET-

TINGS, 3–200

displaying history graphs, 3–182

displaying results, 3–173, 3–175,

3–177

RECALL INSTRUMENT SET-

UPS, 3–36

RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS,

3–53

RECALL RESULTS, 3–195

deleting a pass/fail test from disk,

3–53

deleting test results, 3–195

deleting text, 2–22

DNR, APS COMMANDS, 3–164

Do Nothing, On Test Completion,

3–49

DONE, Edit Mode, 2–19, 2–21,

2–23

Double Alternating, 3–155, 3–156

Dropped Rx Clock, Overhead

Add/Drop Port, G–6

Dropped Rx Data, Overhead Add/

Drop Port, G–6

Description

dropping a tributary signal, 3–110

DS1 add, 3–72

SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS,

3–33

SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS, 3–38,

3–45

DS1 drop, 3–110

DS1 ESF

SAVE RESULTS, 3–193

Destination Node ID, APS COM-

MANDS, 3–165

Detected, SAVE PASS/FAIL

TESTS, 3–39

DS1 Framing, 3–108, 3–128

Framing, 3–95, 3–125

Payload, 3–74, 3–111

DS1 Ext Add, Payload, 3–74

DS1 Path Analysis, ERROR

ANALYSIS, 3–181

dimmed text, 2–16

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Index–3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

DS1 SF (D4)

DS1 Framing, 3–108, 3–128

Framing, 3–94, 3–125

Payload, 3–74, 3–111

DS1 Unframed

DS1 Framing, 3–108, 3–128

Framing, 3–94, 3–125

Payload, 3–74, 3–111

DS1/DS3 AIS, status light, 3–60

DS1/DS3 Option, INSTR CON-

FIG, 3–200

DS1/DS3 YELLOW, status light,

3–60

DS3, Mapping, 3–71, 3–73, 3–106

DS3 Analysis, ERROR ANALY-

SIS, 3–181

EDIT BYTE

K1 Full Byte, 3–163

K2 Full Byte, 3–167

Test Pattern, 3–97

TRANSPORT OVERHEAD,

3–79

edit mode, 2–19

EDIT NAME, Name

SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS,

3–32

SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS, 3–45

SAVE RESULTS, 3–193

EDIT TEXT

Description

DS3 C–bit

SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS,

3–45

Framing, 3–95, 3–125

Payload, 3–75, 3–111

DS3 drop, 3–110

DS3 Ext Add, Payload, 3–75

DS3 Idle, Transmit alarm set to,

3–137

SAVE RESULTS, 3–193

Operator End Prompt, 3–48

Operator Start Prompt, 3–46

EDIT TRACE, J1 byte, 3–83

Edit XX bits, Test Pattern, 3–97

editing

DS3 M13

Framing, 3–95, 3–125

Payload, 3–75, 3–111

DS3 Unframed

Framing, 3–95, 3–125

Payload, 3–75, 3–111

DS3–>DS1 Demux, Mapping,

3–106

binary numbers, 2–20

bytes, 2–20

decimal numbers, 2–17

text, 2–21, 2–22

electrical connections, 2–13

Enter, Edit Mode, 2–22

entering text, 2–22

DSn AIS, Transmit alarm set to,

3–137

DSn Path Analysis, 3–177

DSn Yellow, Transmit alarm set to,

3–137

ERROR, status light, 3–60

Error Count, Fail If condition, 3–41

error messages, B–3

error rate, 3–133

maximum, 3–133

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Index–4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Error Ratio, Fail If condition, 3–39

Error type set to, ERRORS &

ALARMS, 3–132

Errored Seconds, Fail If condition,

3–42

Fail If conditions, Pass/Fail Test,

3–38

Failure, Fail If condition, 3–39

Failure set to, ERRORS &

ALARMS, 3–138

Errors, MAIN RESULTS, 3–175,

3–177

Failures, MAIN RESULTS, 3–175,

3–177

example disk contents, F–1

EXER, APS COMMANDS, 3–164

EXER–R, APS COMMANDS,

3–163

EXER–S, APS COMMANDS,

3–163

FERF, APS COMMANDS, 3–170

15 min, Test Duration, 3–23

files, disk, 2–23

Firmware Revision, INSTR CON-

FIG, 3–199

5 min, Test Duration, 3–23

Flow Control, PRINTER SETUP,

3–205

4 x STS-3c, Signal Structure,

TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–70

Framing, RECEIVE SETTINGS,

3–124

EXIT

Help dialog box, 2–13

PRINT CONTROL dialog box,

3–197, 3–198

External Add

PATH OVERHEAD, 3–86

TRANSPORT OVERHEAD,

3–85

External BITS, Transmit Clock,

3–93

Frequency Offset

Pointer/Timing Mode, 3–149

POINTERS & TIMING, 3–150

FS, APS COMMANDS, 3–165

FS–R, APS COMMANDS, 3–164

FS–S, APS COMMANDS, 3–164

fuse, 1–7

External Drop

PATH OVERHEAD, 3–119

TRANSPORT OVERHEAD,

3–117

External DSn, Transmit Clock,

3–93

external monitor connector, G–1

GPIB connector, G–3

GPIB parameters, 3–206

GPIB Primary Address, REMOTE

CONTROL, 3–207

GPIB programming. See Program-

mer Manual

green lights, 2–4, 3–59

External Add, 3–85

External Drop, 3–118

External Add, 3–86

External Drop, 3–119

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Index–5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

instrument setups

creating, 3–32

Hardware Handshake, REMOTE

CONTROL, 3–209

Hardware Revision, INSTR CON-

FIG, 3–199

HELP button, 2–12

Help dialog box, 2–12

High

recalling, 3–34

Interface Module, INSTR CON-

FIG, 3–200

Internal, Transmit Clock, 3–68,

3–92

Receive Level, 3–103

Transmit Level, 3–69

high-intensity text, 2–16

history graphs

J1 Path Trace byte

editing, 3–82

viewing, 3–116, 3–117

displaying, 3–182

elements of, 3–186

resolution, 3–189

zooming, 3–188

History Resolution, 3–27

Hour, Test Duration, 3–25

K1 Full Byte, APS COMMANDS,

3–162

K2 Full Byte, APS COMMANDS,

3–167

knob, 2–3

knob icon, 2–19

icons, 2–8

IDLE, APS COMMANDS, 3–170

Illegal (Max +1), Pointer Value Set

to, 3–145, 3–146

Inc, GPIB Primary Address, RE-

MOTE CONTROL, 3–207

Increment, Pointer Direction,

3–148

lights

red, 3–60

status, 2–4, 3–58

yellow, 3–60

Independent, Tx/Rx Settings

RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–102,

3–124

Line

ERROR ANALYSIS, 3–177,

3–178

TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–66,

3–92

Initialization Period, 3–152

Initialization Time, POINTERS &

TIMING, 3–158

initializing the CTS, 3–35

INSERT ERROR button, 3–133

installation, 1–7

Offset Mode, 3–150

LINE AIS, status light, 3–60

Line AIS, Transmit alarm set to,

3–136

Line Clock Offset, TRANSMIT

SETTINGS, 3–93

Line DCC, Overhead Add/Drop

Port, G–5, G–6

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Index–6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

LINE FERF, status light, 3–60

Line FERF, Transmit alarm set to,

3–136

Memory 1–6, Save to Memory,

3–33

menu pages, 2–9

line rate, 3–64, 3–90

LOF

menus

RECEIVE, 2–9

Failure set to, 3–138

status lights, 3–60

LONG, APS COMMANDS, 3–169

LOP, status light, 3–60

LOS

Failure set to, 3–138

status light, 3–60

Low, Receive Level, 3–103

Low (15 min), History Resolution,

3–27

RESULTS, 2–9

TEST SETUPS, 2–9

TRANSMIT, 2–9

UTILITY, 2–9

Min 0, Pointer Value Set to, 3–144,

3–146

Min 10000ms, Pointer Rate, 3–147

mini-graphs, 3–191

Minimum Res, history graphs,

3–186

Minute, Test Duration, 3–25

Model, INSTR CONFIG, 3–199

Monitor, Receive Level, 3–103,

3–124

monitoring performance, 3–18

–more– indicator, 2–16

MS, APS COMMANDS, 3–164

MS–R, APS COMMANDS, 3–163

MS–S, APS COMMANDS, 3–163

LP, APS COMMANDS, 3–165

LP–S, APS COMMANDS, 3–164

manuals, related, xxii

Mapping, TRANSMIT SET-

TINGS, 3–71

mapping a tributary signal, 3–72

Mapping line, RECEIVE SET-

TINGS page, 3–105

Name

Max +100ppm, Frequency Offset,

3–150

Max 103, Pointer Value Set to,

3–146

SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS,

3–32

Max 2ms, Pointer Rate, 3–147

Max 48ms, Pointer Rate, 3–147

Max 782, Pointer Value Set to,

3–145

Memory

RECALL INSTRUMENT SET-

UPS, 3–34

SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS, 3–37,

3–44

SAVE RESULTS, 3–192

network stress testing, 3–135

Next, VT Under Test, 3–74

No Mapping (Equipped), Mapping,

3–71

RECALL RESULTS, 3–196

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Index–7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

No Mapping (Unequipped), Map-

ping, 3–71, 3–72

None

Description

SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS,

3–45

SAVE RESULTS, 3–193

Error type set to, 3–133

External Add, 3–85

PATH OVERHEAD, 3–86

External Drop

PATH OVERHEAD, 3–119

TRANSPORT OVERHEAD,

3–118

1:N, APS COMMANDS, 3–169

1 x STS-3c, Signal Structure,

TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–70

#1–15, APS COMMANDS, 3–166,

3–168

Operator End Prompt, SAVE PASS/

FAIL TESTS, 3–38, 3–48

Operator Start Prompt, SAVE

PASS/FAIL TESTS, 3–38, 3–46

optical connections, 2–13

Options, INSTR CONFIG, 3–199

overhead bytes, 3–77

editing, 3–77

viewing, 3–115

Failure set to, 3–138

Transmit alarm set to, 3–136

none, in tables, xxii

Normal, Receive Level, 3–124

Normal (1 min), History Resolu-

tion, 3–27

Not Detected, SAVE PASS/FAIL

TESTS, 3–39

NR, APS COMMANDS, 3–163,

3–164

packaging for shipment, I–1

page tabs, 2–7, 2–9

pages, 2–9

parameters

changing, 2–15

selecting, 2–16

Parity

Null Trace, J1 byte, 3–83

PRINTER SETUP, 3–205

REMOTE CONTROL, 3–209

Pass/Fail test

condition type, 3–38

creating, 3–37, 3–44

specific condition, 3–38

starting, 3–49

Offline, GPIB Primary Address,

REMOTE CONTROL, 3–207

Offset Mode, POINTERS & TIM-

ING, 3–150

threshold, 3–38

On, Tributary Drop, 3–112

On AMI, Tributary Drop, 3–112

On B8ZS, Tributary Drop, 3–112

On Test Completion, SAVE PASS/

FAIL TESTS, 3–38

1 hour, Test Duration, 3–23

1 in 8, Test Pattern, 3–75, 3–96,

3–126

Path

APS COMMANDS, 3–169

ERROR ANALYSIS, 3–177

PATH AIS, status light, 3–60

Path AIS, Transmit alarm set to,

3–136

Path Analysis, ERROR ANALY-

SIS, 3–177, 3–179

PATH FERF, status light, 3–60

1+1, APS COMMANDS, 3–169

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Index–8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Path FERF, Transmit alarm set to,

3–136

Pointer Control, POINTERS &

TIMING, 3–147

Path Overhead, viewing, 3–80,

3–116, 3–117

Pointer Direction, POINTERS &

TIMING, 3–148, 3–157

Pointer Rate, POINTERS & TIM-

ING, 3–147, 3–158

Pointer S–Bits, Pointers & Timing,

3–146

path overhead bytes, setting, 3–77

Path User Channel (F2), Overhead

Add/Drop Port, G–5, G–6

PATTERN LOCK, status light,

3–59

Pause Control line, PATH OVER-

HEAD page, 3–120

Payload, Offset Mode, 3–150

Payload Analysis, ERROR ANAL-

YSIS, 3–177, 3–180

Pointer Type, POINTERS & TIM-

ING, 3–142, 3–157

Pointer Value Set to, POINTERS &

TIMING, 3–144, 3–145

Pointer/Timing Mode, POINTERS

& TIMING, 3–141, 3–149,

3–156

payload mapping, 3–104

DS3, 3–110

setting, 3–71

Pointers, MAIN RESULTS, 3–175,

3–177

power connector, 1–9

unequipped, 3–114

power requirements, 1–9

POWEROUT, history graphs,

3–187

VT1.5 Floating Async, 3–72,

3–110

performance monitoring, 3–18

Periodic 26–1, 3–154, 3–156

With Add, 3–155, 3–156

With Cancel, 3–155, 3–156

Periodic 87–3, 3–154, 3–156

With Add, 3–154, 3–156

With Cancel, 3–154, 3–156

Periodic Continuous, 3–153, 3–156

With Add, 3–154, 3–156

With Cancel, 3–156

Preview

Operator End Prompt, 3–48

Operator Start Prompt, 3–46

Previous, VT Under Test, 3–74

AutoScan dialog box, 3–58

PRINT CONTROL dialog box,

3–197, 3–198

PRINT button, 3–197

Print Error Analysis, PRINT CON-

TROL dialog box, 3–197

Print Last Screen, PRINT CON-

TROL dialog box, 3–198

Print Main Results, PRINT CON-

TROL dialog box, 3–197

Print Summary, On Test Comple-

tion, 3–49

with Cancel, 3–153

Phase Transient, 3–153, 3–155

pin assignments

Overhead Add/Drop Port, G–5

RS-232, G–3

VGA video output, G–1

Pointer, Fail If condition, 3–43

POINTER ACTION button, 3–142

POINTER ADJ, status light, 3–60

pointer adjust mode, 3–141

Print User & Company, PRINTER

SETUP, 3–206

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Index–9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

printer setup, 3–203

Printer Type, PRINTER SETUP,

3–204

Reset Overhead

J1 byte, PATH OVERHEAD,

3–83

printers

RS–232 parameters, 3–204

supported, 3–204

printing results, 3–196

Programmer Manual, xxii

TRANSPORT OVERHEAD,

3–79

RESLT_XX, Name, SAVE RE-

SULTS, 3–192

results, displaying, 3–175, 3–177

RESULTS button, 2–11

Ring, APS COMMANDS, 3–161

RR, APS COMMANDS, 3–164

RR–R, APS COMMANDS, 3–163

RR–S, APS COMMANDS, 3–163

RS-232 connector, G–3

RS-232 parameters, 3–208

Run, Self Test Control, 3–211

Rx Common, Overhead Add/Drop

Port, G–6

reading disk file names, 2–24

Recall, RECALL PASS/FAIL

TESTS, 3–50

Recall Result, RECALL RE-

SULTS, 3–194, 3–196

Recall Setup, RECALL INSTRU-

MENT SETUPS, 3–34, 3–35

RECEIVE, APS COMMANDS,

3–172

Rx Frame Pulse, Overhead Add/

Drop Port, G–7

RECEIVE button, 2–11

Receive Level, RECEIVE SET-

TINGS, 3–103, 3–124

Receive Rate, RECEIVE SET-

TINGS, 3–100, 3–122

S–Bits, Pointers, Pointers & Tim-

ing, 3–146

receive settings, coupled vs. inde-

pendent, 3–101

Received Optical Power, SIGNAL

STATUS, 3–114

Received Peak Voltage, SIGNAL

STATUS, 3–114

Save Current, Disk Operation,

SAVE RESULTS, 3–194

Save File

Disk Operation, 3–52

SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS,

3–49

Recovered, Transmit Clock, 3–68,

3–93

SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS,

3–34

red lights, 2–4, 3–60

Save Previous, Disk Operation,

SAVE RESULTS, 3–194

Reference (programmer), xxii

Reference manual, xxii

repackaging for shipment, I–1

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Index–10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Save to Disk

SF–HP, APS COMMANDS, 3–165

SF–LP, APS COMMANDS, 3–164

SF–R, APS COMMANDS, 3–163

SF–S, APS COMMANDS, 3–164

SHORT, APS COMMANDS,

3–169

Show Next Top, HISTORY

GRAPHS, 3–190

Showing Overhead for, TRANS-

PORT OVERHEAD, 3–78,

3–116

SIGNAL PRESENT, status light,

3–59

signal status, checking, 3–55

signal status indicators, 2–7

Signal Structure, RECEIVE SET-

TINGS, 3–103

On Test Completion, 3–49

SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS,

3–34

SAVE RESULTS, 3–194

Save to Memory, SAVE INSTRU-

MENT SETUPS, 3–33

saving test results, 3–192

Scan All VTs, AUTOSCAN dialog

box, 3–57

SD–HP, APS COMMANDS,

3–164

SD–LP, APS COMMANDS, 3–164

SD–P, APS COMMANDS, 3–163

SD–R, APS COMMANDS, 3–163

SD–S, APS COMMANDS, 3–163

Second, Test Duration, 3–25

Section, ERROR ANALYSIS,

3–177, 3–178

Single, 3–153, 3–155

Pointer Control, 3–142

Single Alternating, 3–155, 3–156

Software Handshake, REMOTE

CONTROL, 3–209

Source Node ID, APS COM-

MANDS, 3–167

Span, APS COMMANDS, 3–161

standard accessories, 1–2

START/STOP button, 3–27, 3–49

Status, APS COMMANDS, 3–170

status lights, 2–4, 2–5, 3–58–3–62

status messages, B–1

Section DCC, Overhead Add/Drop

Port, G–5, G–6

Section User Channel (F1), Over-

head Add/Drop Port, G–5, G–6

selected parameter, 2–7

self test, 1–10, 3–210

Sequence Period, 3–152

Sequence Type, POINTERS &

TIMING, 3–157

Serial Number, INSTR CONFIG,

3–199

Service Manual, xxii

Stop Bits

SET DATE, MISC SETTINGS,

3–202

SET TIME, MISC SETTINGS,

3–202

PRINTER SETUP, 3–205

REMOTE CONTROL, 3–209

Stress +4.6ppm, Frequency Offset,

3–150

Set Value, Pointer Control, 3–144

Set with New Data Flag, POINT-

ERS & TIMING, 3–146

settings, default, 3–35, C–1

SETUP_XX, Name, SAVE

INSTRUMENT SETUPS, 3–32

Stress –4.6ppm, Frequency Offset,

3–150

STS LOP, Failure set to, 3–138

STS Under Test

RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–104

TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–70

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Index–11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

STS-1, Signal Structure, RECEIVE

SETTINGS, 3–104

STS-3c, Signal Structure, RE-

CEIVE SETTINGS, 3–104

symbols (icons) in display, 2–8

TRANSMIT button, 2–11

Transmit Clock, TRANSMIT

SETTINGS, 3–68, 3–92

TRANSMIT column, APS COM-

MANDS, 3–170

Transmit Default, Transmit Setup,

3–171

Transmit Illegal, Transmit Setup,

3–171

Transmit Level, TRANSMIT

SETTINGS, 3–69

transmit parameters, 3–63

Transmit Rate, TRANSMIT SET-

TINGS, 3–64, 3–90

transmit settings, coupled vs.

independent, 3–65, 3–90

Transmit Setup, APS COM-

MANDS, 3–171

Transmit User Setup, Transmit

Setup, 3–171

transport overhead bytes, 3–77

tributary signal, dropping, 3–110

TroubleScan, 3–173

TEST BEGIN dialog box, 3–50

Test Duration

SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS, 3–38,

3–47

TEST TIME, 3–23

test duration limits, 3–26

Test Pattern

RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–125

TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–75,

3–96

test results, displaying, 3–173

TEST SETUPS button, 2–11

test state indicator, 2–7

TEST_XX, Name, SAVE PASS/

FAIL TESTS, 3–44

turn on sequence, 1–9

tests

12 x STS-1, Signal Structure,

TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–70

Tx Common, Overhead Add/Drop

Port, G–6

Tx Delay (Seconds), REMOTE

CONTROL, 3–209

Tx Frame Pulse, Overhead Add/

Drop Port, G–7

Tx Terminator, REMOTE CON-

TROL, 3–210

Tx/Rx Settings

RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–102,

3–123

TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–65,

3–66, 3–90, 3–91, 3–92

actions not allowed during, 3–28

changes not allowed during, 3–28

setting history resolution, 3–27

setting test duration, 3–23, 3–25

starting and stopping, 3–27–3–30

3 in 24, Test Pattern, 3–75, 3–96

3 x STS-1, Signal Structure,

TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–70

Through Mode, Transmit Rate,

3–67

time, setting, 3–202

To Disk BMP Format, 3–204

To Disk EPS Format, 3–204

To Disk Ileaf Format, 3–204

Transmit alarm set to, ERRORS &

ALARMS, 3–135

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Index–12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Tx/Rx Settings line, RECEIVE

SETTINGS page, 3–101

UTILITY button, 2–11

V5 byte, editing, 3–80

VGA connector, G–1

View Help, Help dialog box, 2–12

viewing APS response, 3–172

VT 1.5 Analysis, ERROR ANAL-

YSIS, 3–179

Unknown, Test Pattern, 3–129

RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–109,

3–113, 3–126

USER, Fail If table, SAVE PASS/

FAIL TESTS, 3–48

User Channel, G–5

adding, 3–84

VT 1.5 Async, Mapping, 3–71,

3–105

dropping, 3–117

VT AIS

USER DEFINED

status light, 3–60

Error rate set to, 3–135

Frequency Offset, 3–150

Line Clock Offset, 3–93

Pointer Rate, 3–147

Pointer Value Set to, 3–145

Test Duration

SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS,

3–47

TEST CONTROL, 3–24

User Name, PRINTER SETUP,

3–206

User Trace, J1 byte, 3–83

User Word, Test Pattern, RECEIVE

SETTINGS, 3–109, 3–113,

3–129

User Word 16 bit, Test Pattern,

3–75

RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–126

TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–96

User Word 24 bit, Test Pattern,

3–75

Transmit alarm set to, 3–136

VT FERF

status light, 3–60

Transmit alarm set to, 3–137

VT LOM, Failure set to, 3–138

VT LOP, Failure set to, 3–138

VT#1, VT Under Test, 3–74

VT#28, VT Under Test, 3–74

VT1.5 Async, Mapping, 3–73

VT1.5 Floating Async payload

mapping, 3–72, 3–110

VT1.5 Overhead, 3–116

WTR, APS COMMANDS, 3–163,

3–164

RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–126

TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–96

User Word 8 bit, Test Pattern, 3–75

RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–126

TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–96

XConnect

Receive Level, 3–103

Transmit Level, 3–69

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Index–13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Zoom In, HISTORY GRAPHS,

3–189

yellow lights, 2–5, 3–60

Zoom Out, HISTORY GRAPHS,

3–189

0. DEFAULT memory, RECALL

INSTRUMENT SETUPS page,

3–35

CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual

Index–14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Teac Stereo Amplifier AI 501DA User Manual
The Speaker Company Speaker System MM516 User Manual
Toastmaster Mixer TMSM350 User Manual
Tonino Lamborghini Marine GPS System MDR24 96 User Manual
Triarch Indoor Furnishings 33232 User Manual
Uniden Telephone 7100A User Manual
Vermont Casting Outdoor Fireplace EWF36 User Manual
ViewSonic Flat Panel Television N2652w User Manual
Viking Microwave Oven F20974 User Manual
Vivotek Digital Camera PT3114 User Manual